JP7108310B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game that variably displays identification information in a plurality of variable display areas based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and that can generate a special game state when the result of the game is a special result.

A variable display device capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning area, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, a player can a game machine capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game value is imparted to , wherein a start storage means capable of storing a start memory as an execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area; prior determination means capable of determining the result of the variable display game based on the starting memory stored in the starting memory before execution of the variable display game based on the starting memory;
Specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance based on one start memory stored in the start storage means, and a prior notice performance corresponding to the specific performance can be executed based on the determination result of the prior determination means. advance notice effect means, wherein the advance notice effect means has suggestive information display means capable of displaying specific effect execution information suggesting execution of the specific effect as the advance notice effect, (See Patent Document 1, for example). That is, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting execution of a predetermined effect.

JP 2014-226243 A

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing interest in suggestive effects.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating an advantageous state for the player according to the result of the game,
a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting execution of a predetermined advance notice effect,
In the suggestive effect, a specific display can be displayed,
The specific display has a first specific display and a second specific display,
Depending on the number and types of specific displays displayed in the suggestive effect, the degree of expectation for execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is different,
The expectation level of the first suggestive effect consisting of one of the first specific displays, the expectation level of the second suggestive effect of one of the second specific displays, and the second suggestive effect of a plurality of the first specific displays. 3, the expectation level of a fourth suggestive effect consisting of a plurality of the second specific displays, and the fifth suggestive effect consisting of the first specific display and the second specific display. Differentiate expectations and
The degree of expectation of the fourth suggestive performance is set higher than that of the second suggested performance, and the degree of expectation of the fifth suggested performance is set lower than that of the second suggested performance.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the suggestive presentation.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining output processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining payout command transmission processing; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. 9 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value confirmation processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hard random number acquisition processing; It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. (a) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing during normal figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a normal figure hit. 10 is a flowchart for explaining external information editing processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining external information editing processing; It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a figure explaining another example of setting of a probability set value. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in the first modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing in a second modified example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining determination condition monitoring processing in a second modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in a third modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining transition determination processing in a third modified example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining states of switches corresponding to probability set values in a fourth modified example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing in a fourth modification; FIG. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means in a 5th modification, and a game control apparatus. FIG. 16 is a flowchart for explaining probability set value confirmation processing in a sixth modification; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in a seventh modified example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing in a seventh modification; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing in an eighth modified example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining probability set value confirmation processing in a ninth modification; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value confirmation processing in a tenth modification; FIG. It is a figure explaining the alerting|reporting aspect in the 11th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure explaining the modification of suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a flow chart explaining a modification of main processing in a production control device. It is a flow chart explaining assist design control processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining production substitution processing. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of a game board. 4 is a flowchart for explaining replay control processing; It is a flow chart explaining the look-ahead pattern system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a figure explaining the 1st example of game ball look-ahead production. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example of game ball look-ahead production. It is a figure explaining the 3rd example of game ball look-ahead production. It is a figure explaining a game ball storage device. It is a figure explaining a starting winning unit. It is a figure explaining a starting winning unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of an out zone unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of an out zone unit. It is a figure explaining an example of the game triggered by pseudo-winning. It is a figure explaining an example of the game triggered by pseudo-winning.

<First Embodiment>
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . In addition, the front frame (body frame) 12 has a game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the device 0 is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (
a storage tray), an upper tray ball outlet 22 through which game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full. A storage lower tray (receiving tray) 23, an operation handle 24 of the ball shooting device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 containing a performance button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card
etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect etc. that intervened the operation of the player are performed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 includes resin side cases 3 provided at the four corners of the game board 30.
3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. Display device 41
is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. - 特許庁That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).
Further, the left and right parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 which serves as a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special figure variation display game by operating movable effect members. The board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

In addition, in the lower left part of the center case 40, a sub for displaying the fourth symbol for executing the decoration special figure variation display game separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the number of starting memories is displayed. An information display device 90 is provided.

This sub-information display device 90 is composed of a single light-emitting section serving as a sub-game display section for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decoration special-figure variation display game corresponding to the first special-figure variation display game. A second sub game display section 91 and a single light emitting section forming a sub game display section for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. A game display unit 92 is provided. Further, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of the first starting memory that is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by two light emitting units, and a second special figure variation display game by two light emitting units and a second sub-display 94 that indicates the number of second starting memories that you are entitled to.

In the first sub-game display section 91 and the second sub-game display section 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is being displayed in a variation display and a display indicating the result are displayed. can be displayed by In addition, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 display the number of the first starting memory (special figure 1 pending) and the second starting memory (special figure 2 pending), respectively, turning off the two light emitting units, It can be displayed by flashing or lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth pattern can be displayed on the display device 4.
1, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied, and the display area can be effectively utilized. The sub-information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board presentation device 44, so that the sub-information display device 90 is not covered during the operation of the board presentation device 44. .

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate 34 (normal pattern start gate, start area, inflow area) that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. The game ball that has won the normal figure start gate 34 is a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3)
detected by
In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal pattern starting gate 34. - 特許庁The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that provides conditions for starting the first special figure variation display game. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, immediately below the starting winning opening 36, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a condition for starting the second special figure fluctuation display game.
The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls down toward the front side to open and allow the game balls to easily flow in, and the movable member 37b is
It always maintains a closed closed state (state disadvantageous to the player) in which game balls cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device opens the game ball to easily flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and to win prizes in the closed state rather than in the open state.
In addition, below the normal variable prize winning device 37, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.

Furthermore, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game A prize winning device (large prize winning opening) 38 is provided.
The special variable prize winning device 38 has an attacker type open/close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. From the closed state (unfavorable blocked state for the player) to the open state (
state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38, for example,
An open/close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device
Equipped with a big winning hole that is opened and closed by , and during a special game state or a small winning game state, the big winning hole is changed from a closed state to an open state to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole. and give a predetermined game value (a prize ball) to the player. In addition, inside the big winning opening (winning area), a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is arranged. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the area to the left of the center case 40 in the game area 32 where game balls flow down is the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is the right area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win a prize in the starting prize-winning opening 36 by adjusting the shooting force and shooting a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed hitting), and shooting a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called By hitting to the right), the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal fluctuation winning device 3
7 or the special variable winning device 38 can be aimed at.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and discharges to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the channel formed by the channel forming member 42 . At least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized from the front of the flow path forming member 42 through the flow path forming member 42. .

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34 A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a general pattern variation display game triggered by winning a prize and for displaying various types of information.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit (special figure 1 indicator) 51 and a second special figure for the first special figure variation display game, which is composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. A second special figure variation display unit (special figure 2 indicator) 52 for the variation display game, a variation display unit (normal figure display device) 53 for the general figure variation display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp and memory display units 54, 55 and 56 for notifying the start memory number of each variable display game.
In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display, right-handed informing unit) 57 for notifying that the game state is more advantageous for right-handed players than left-handed players. A second game state display unit (second game state indicator, time saving state notification unit) 58 that lights up when a state occurs to notify the occurrence of a time saving state, and a high probability state of a big hit when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A third game state display unit (third game state display device, probability state display unit) 59 for displaying that
A round display section 6 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning device 38)
0 is provided.
The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big win occurs to notify the occurrence of the big win.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the display device 41 is performing the decoration special figure variation display game, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing cycle is set to 100 ms, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, in addition to the central segment, the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segments is also blinked and varied. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
When the result of the game is "losing", for example, the center segment is turned on as the mode of the result of losing. The game result is displayed by turning on the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode.

The normal figure indicator 53 flashes a lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or lighting color according to the game result. In addition, the general pattern holding indicator 56 displays the starting memory number (= number of reservations) of the general pattern starting gate 34, which is the fluctuation start condition of the general pattern display 53, by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. Special figure 1 hold indicator 54
, the number of winning balls to the starting winning port 36, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 indicator 51, is the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = number of reservations) by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. indicate. Special Figure 2 hold indicator 55, the second start winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) starting memory number (= number of holding), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, turning off a plurality of LEDs, Displayed by flashing or lighting.

The first game state display unit (right-handed informing unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (at the time of right-handed hitting), the lamp is turned on.

The second game state display unit (time saving state notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and in the normal game state where the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time reduction function is not activated), the lamp is turned off. When the time saving state is generated (when the variable time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

A third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like.
When the probability state of the big win is low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of 0 is turned on, the lamp is turned off, and when the probability state of the big win is high probability state (variable probability state) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. turns on the lamp.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in progress, the lamp is turned off. turn it on. It should be noted that the round display section may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer called an amusement chip (IC).
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operation clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for a random number generation circuit, and the like. DC32V, DC12V, D
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as C5V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-power supply that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V, DC 5V from a voltage of DC 32V, and the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 Power supply voltage at the time of power failure. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And, it has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100
1 (especially built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as backup storage means capable of retaining stored data even when the power is cut off. When the power is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time. The power outage monitoring signal is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a win, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means having a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed,
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same A state that has become identification information,
However, excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-reach effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random number generation for generating a variation pattern random number for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (
(jackpot or small hit) or loss), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operating state of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving Based on the operating state), the number of starting memories, etc., any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. where CPU
111A constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table from a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to release the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a in the normal starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a logic signal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, the proximity I/F1
21, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the prize winning port switch 35a and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also inputted. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 is provided with a set value change detecting means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting from a plurality of set probability values to which a probability value for a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operating section forming the first operating section of the operating sections. The setting key operation unit has a keyhole into which a setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The set value change switch 151 detects operation of a set value change button forming a second operation section of the operation section. The set value change button is a push button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed.
When it is not pressed, it is turned off.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a special result probability value is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is in the game. It's meant to be used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability value assigned to each probability setting is 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, and 1/28 for setting 5.
0, setting 6 is 1/270. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state,
The probability value in the high probability state is ten times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the game machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, thereby setting the probability setting value. can be changed, and by pressing a set value change button in this probability set value change state, the probability set value can be changed. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 .

In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned on after the game machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned on. When it is turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.
is displayed, but the probability setting value confirmation mode is set in which the probability setting value cannot be changed.

The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and the probability setting values are from 1 to
It is designed to be displayed with 6 numbers. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs. Alternatively, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability setting value information may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio.
In this case, while operating the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), the information of the probability setting value is displayed, otherwise the calculated base value and role ratio Give priority to display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the set value change button, the set key operation unit, and the probability set value display device 15
3 etc. are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 selects a probability set value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit. It is intended to constitute a setting means to enable. The function of this setting means may be provided in the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100 . That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100 . In this case, the operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability setting value in the game control device 100, or the setting sub board side change and determine the probability set value based on the operation of the set value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152;
A determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is
0 to a test-firing test apparatus (not shown) through a relay board 70. FIG.
Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123 .

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is processed by the enable signal CE when the game microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24) based signal), and an out-ball detection switch signal (a signal based on the detection of the out-switch for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing), and through the data bus 140, the game microcomputer 111 A first input port 122 is provided that feeds into the .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . The reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of a certification organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, by the game machine controlling the game. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38, and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
A second solenoid for outputting opening/closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c that opens the solenoid b.
An output port 134 is provided. Also, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and character product ratio.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 . Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 1 for outputting ON/OFF drive signals for the segment lines on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, and a fifth driver 138e for receiving the display data output from the second output port 134 and displaying it on the status display device 160 are provided. .

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each game machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be restored even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding data and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 forming a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a working area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decorative lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to inform the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait to inform that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the tone generator LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 .
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and a sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15; Board production device 4 provided
4 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display on the display device 41) is provided with a board performance movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to an address/data bus 340.
is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the . In addition, the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for performance), and the moving movable performance member performs a game performance including a special figure fluctuation display game. A production device may be provided, and a frame production movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame production device may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, etc. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311,
A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the performance control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311
3.3V DC based on 5V DC
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. Also, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (
A game is played by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34 and a general winning opening 35. , a start winning port 36, a normal variable winning device 37 or a special variable winning device 38, or flows into an out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. And general prize gate 35
, When a game ball wins the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) It is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the dispensed unit.

In the normal pattern start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) consisting of a non-contact switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern start gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 11 of game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
In 1A, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the normal pattern start memory number Add (+1) and store one normal map start memory in ROM 111B. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern variation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern variation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern variation display game wins and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If there is no winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the general pattern indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the general pattern variation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.
In addition, the normal figure display 53 is composed of the display device 41, and the normal identification information includes numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, variably display this for a predetermined period of time, and then stop display to display the result.

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern indicator 53 displays a lighting pattern of any one of the first winning stop pattern to the third winning stop pattern, which form a special result mode, corresponding to the type of win. Along with the stop display, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated and the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display 53 is controlled to display a lighting pattern as a result of the loss.

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 is set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
), and stores a second starting memory forming a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on winnings to the starting prize winning port 36 and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. Numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as first start memory and second start memory. Then, the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 of the collective display device 50, and the display device 41 of the center case 40 also decorates the special figure start memory displayed as a display. It is also displayed on the first sub-display section 91 and the second sub-display section 92 of the sub-information display device 90 .

Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The random number for judging the big hit is compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability setting value, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed.

When executing the first special figure variation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 indicator 51 (variation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined variation time. After performing the display during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the process of displaying the first special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Also, when executing the second special figure variation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 indicator 52 (variation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined variation time. After performing the display during the special figure 2 fluctuation, the process of displaying the second special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) corresponds to the special figure variation display game, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example,
(numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) is displayed in a decorative special figure variation display game. In addition, the sub game display section of the sub information display device 90 performs processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game in which the light emission mode of the light emitting section is changed corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

The decoration special symbol variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers etc. in the display device 41 is displayed in the left variation display area (first special symbol),
In each of the right variation display area (second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed at which identification is difficult. After a predetermined time, the changing patterns are sequentially stopped in the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of a character to enhance interest.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 makes the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 a special result mode or a small win result mode. A lighting pattern is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small winning game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating a special game state or a small winning game state, the C
The PU 111A, for example, opens the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and performs control to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. 1 to release
Control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeate) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100, based on the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game, after the end of the special game state, as a game state time-saving state (specific game state, normal figure high probability state, second operation state)
can be generated. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.
That is, the operating state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is controlled in either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than in the first operating state. .

Also, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 6
00 milliseconds, and when the normal fluctuation display game is a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500) of the first winning stop symbol
m seconds × 1 time), the opening time of the second hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 17
00 ms x 2 times), the opening time of the third hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and the number of open times (for example,
1700 ms×3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game (
Normal figure fluctuation time) can be controlled to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time (for example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (e.g. 100 ms equals 1
352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the normal electric power) is set to the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the second number of times of opening to a greater number of times (for example, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the case of the normal operation state. It can be a probability (universal pattern high probability state, eg, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the time to convert longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. In addition, it is also possible to select either the first opening mode or the second opening mode when the win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be separate indicators or the same indicator, but each special figure fluctuation display so as not to be executed at the same time. Game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices and separate display areas for the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or the same display device and display area may be used. However, the decorative special figure variation display games are displayed independently and not simultaneously. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. - 特許庁again,
The second special figure variation display game is to be executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and when the execution of the special figure variation display game becomes possible, the second special figure variation display game is performed. It is designed to be executed (executed with priority). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special figure variation display games.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, a starting port 2 switch 37a, a gate switch 34a, a winning port switch 35a, a large winning port switch 38a in the normal variable winning device 37, and an out switch for detecting all game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. there is Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and a predetermined register (
For example, the D register) is set to the upper address of the RAM start address (step S4)
. In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and 00h at the beginning is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
Processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the subordinate control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal startup. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so that the control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

It should be noted that the third input port 124 has a setting value change switch 151 and a setting key switch 1
52 and the signal from the body frame open detection switch are input, and by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the set value change switch 151 when the power is turned on. Also, the state of the setting key switch 152 and the open state of the front frame 12 (body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 serves as open/close detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front frame 12 . As described above, with the front frame 12 opened,
When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating section turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state is entered in which the probability setting value can be changed. Also, if the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation section is not turned to the second position and the setting value change button is pressed, the RA
M111C is cleared (initialized). Since the setting key operation part and the setting value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the front frame 12
are required to be open.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the standby time starts, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue operating the set value change button from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, such troublesome operations are not required, and a situation in which the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (step S9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9). Also, if the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be cut off. in this way,
By judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. .

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the value of the timer is 0 is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Moreover, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and off data is output to all output ports (output (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg 5Ah) (step S16), and if normal (step S16; Y)
, the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h
) (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (step S18). match the checksum (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability setting value is changed (step S2
1). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

If it is in this probability setting value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to perform RAM initialization processing and processing to make the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed. Here, it is determined that the probability set value is being changed when the power supply is cut off while the probability set value is being changed and the data in the RAM is normally backed up. It is designed to be in a value change state. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S21; N), the state of the third input port 124 read earlier is changed to the body frame (
It is determined whether the front frame 12) is open (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, a probability setting value area, an initial value random number area, a variation pattern random number area, a game control area, and a state display area are set in order from the top. In the probability setting value area, a probability setting value area for storing information on the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. be done. This work area includes a working probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In addition, the area for the initial value random number stores the jackpot design initial value random number, the small winning design initial value random number, the winning initial value random number, and the winning design initial value random number which are updated at any time. In addition, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3, which are updated as needed, are stored in the fluctuation pattern random number area. In the area for game control, a work area and a stack area are set in which information (various data and programs) necessary for game control is stored. In addition, in the work area for status display, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying the base value, the character ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing, and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. The information necessary for displaying the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected in the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering the prize opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, during the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize gate (excluding middle ones) (so-called continuous role ratio), information necessary to display the role ratio includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role).

The RAM clear head address 2 is the head address of the area for the initial value random numbers, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random numbers, the area for the variation pattern random numbers, and the The area for game control is cleared. Note that the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. A RAM clear start address 1, which will be described later, is the start address of the probability setting value area. Area for, area for variation pattern random numbers and area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Furthermore, the RAM clear top address 3, which will be described later, is the top address of the area for game control, and when this address is set, the RA
By performing the process of clearing M, the area for game control is cleared.

Regarding the status display area, the legitimacy of the status display edit output process in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is determined, and if there is an abnormality, the area is initialized, but the backed up information is not normal. The state display area may also be initialized in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear top address 1 set in the case is set. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM with the RAM clear start address 1 set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. In addition, one or more of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, the area for the game control and the area for the state display may be targeted. When multiple areas are targeted, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the validity may be determined individually. You may make it determine collectively.

If the body frame is open (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the previously read state of the third input port 124 (step S23).
). If the setting key switch is on (step S23; Y), step S35
, where the RAM is initialized and the probability set value change state is set so that the probability set value can be changed. Also, if the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N),
If the body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process moves to step S24, and it is determined whether the set value change switch is in the ON state based on the previously read state of the third input port 124 (step S24). do.

If the set value change switch is not on (step S24; N), step S30
, and perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure. In addition, if the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41, the initialization of the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the RAM area for game control. process. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is configured to operate the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. Initialization means for initializing the

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S
16; N or step S17; N), if it is determined that the checksums do not match (
At step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25 to initialize all RAM areas. That is, the RAM area for probability setting values and the RAM area for status display are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. In addition, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear top address 1 is set (step S25), and the previously read third
It is determined from the state of the input port 124 whether the body frame (front frame 12) is open (step S26). If the body frame is open (step S26; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the previously read state of the third input port 124 (step S27). If the setting key switch is on (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to initialize the RAM and to change the probability set value changeable state. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the probability setting value area and the initial value random number area , the area for variation pattern random numbers and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. Note that the state display area may also be initialized here.

Also, if the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or if the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), the command (specific information) for setting change instruction is sent to the effect control board (effect control device). 300) (step S28), prohibits access to the RAM (step S29), stops control, and waits for power off of the gaming machine. Production control device 30
In 0, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board effect device 44, and the speaker 19a are performed based on the reception of the setting change instruction command. , 19b to output a voice or the like to prompt the user to change the probability set value. This notification continues until the game machine is powered off.

In this case, after turning off the power of the game machine, if the power is turned on again with the front frame 12 opened and the setting key of the setting key operation section turned to the second position, the setting key is turned on in the process of step S27. It is determined that the switch is on (step S27; Y), and step S35
, and performs a process of initializing the RAM and a process of setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed. In addition, when the control is stopped after moving to step S29, without opening the front frame 12 after shutting off the power of the game machine, or without turning the setting key of the setting key operation section to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and it is not possible to shift to the probability set value change state, so the processing of steps S28 and S29 is reached again.

In addition, although he is trying to perform notification by transmitting a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform notification. For example, the game control device 100 may be notified in the batch display device 50 controlled, in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, so as to perform a display that is not used as identification information Alternatively, an indicator for announcing an abnormality may be provided.

In step S30 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. After that, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if it is not in the high probability of the special figure (step S31; N), steps S32, S3
3 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. In addition, when the special figure is in the high probability (step S31; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. proceed to In the case of this embodiment, in step S34, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of the selected probability setting value, screen designation A plurality of commands such as a command (for example, a customer waiting demo command in the case of a customer waiting state, and a recovery screen command in other cases) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information, which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform the effect according to the probability set value, and the effect of the game according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a set probability value such as different selection probabilities.

The screen designation command transmits a command corresponding to the state of the resumed game. When resuming the special figure variation display game that was interrupted by the power cutoff with the resumption of control, a recovery screen command that constitutes recovery information is transmitted as a screen designation command. Furthermore, in this case, information regarding the result of the restarted special figure variation display game is also transmitted. Also, when the power supply is interrupted during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, a customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen designation command. Also, when resuming the special game state that was interrupted by the power shutdown along with resuming the control, a special game state resuming command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

In step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S35 in FIG. 6) as a process of initializing the RAM and setting the probability setting value changeable state (step S
35), save the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step S36).
Here, when the backed-up information is normal and the process proceeds from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear top address 2 is set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for game control , the RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the probability setting value area and the state display area are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for initial value random numbers and the area for variation pattern random numbers.

On the other hand, if the backed-up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, RA
Since the M clear head address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initialized value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation section (here, the setting key operation section). Note that the state display area may also be initialized here.

The area to be initialized is an area to be set to a value other than 0 among the areas cleared to 0, for example, an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. When all RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 to the probability setting value area. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability,
Damage to the game parlor can be minimized even when the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or fraudulent act. By setting a value other than 0 as the initial value, it is possible to set a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, a probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of setting the probability setting value changing state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability setting value change state is entered. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, it becomes possible to display information on the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153 .

Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the working probability setting value area (step S39), and the command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S40). , the process proceeds to step S45. In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command during probability setting change, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90,
Light emission of LEDs of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, operation of board effect device 44, speaker 19
A notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed is made by outputting voice by means of a and 19b. In addition, although RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 here. A setting for outputting a security signal is also performed. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output only for a predetermined period of time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period of the probability setting value change state. Also, since the RAM has not yet been initialized here, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be performed.

In addition, in step S41 of FIG. 6 as processing for initializing the RAM area for game control, RA
The M clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S43). As a result, the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers and the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0 and the initial values are saved. A timer is also set for outputting the security signal. That is, the game control device 100 serves as initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation section (set value change button in this case).

And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production|presentation control board (production|presentation control apparatus 300) (step S44), and it progresses to step S45. In the case of this embodiment, in step S44,
Model designation command, special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command,
Probability setting value information, which is information on the selected probability setting value, RAM initialization command (to display the customer waiting demo screen and notify the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) command). Also, depending on the model,
In addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command and a high-probability number-of-times information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information, which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform the effect according to the probability set value, and the effect of the game according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a set probability value such as different selection probabilities.

In step S45, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform processing to activate the circuit. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step S45, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
done by A. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. A bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the extracted random number bit arrangement (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers to determine the winning pattern of the special pattern (big hit pattern random number, small winning pattern random number), random numbers to determine the hit of the general pattern (hit random number ), save the initial value (start value) of the random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the normal pattern in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S47), and then allow the interrupt (step S48).
Since the random number generating circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S49) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the jackpot design initial value random number, the small winning design initial value random number, the winning initial value random number, and the winning design initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the "jackpot design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the "small hit design initial value random number" is the special figure fluctuation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small winning stop symbol of the game. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the winning of the normal pattern variation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the winning stop symbol of the normal pattern variation display game. A random number that is the initial value for determining In this way, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in machines without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there are game machines that do not have winning symbol initial value random numbers.

Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit pattern random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in a random number generating circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and winning pattern random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit pattern random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step S49, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and data bus.
is set (step S50), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S5
1). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the initial value random number update process (
Return to step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number update process (step S49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting due to the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step S49 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing.
This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52).
. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S5
2;N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S53
), a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step S57) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S59), it waits until the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
Initialization operation unit (set value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and initialization means (game , and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main processing, after the processing of step S28 is performed, step S26
step S26 to S2 until the setting key switch is turned on.
8 may be repeated. That is, the game control may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124 rather than the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Furthermore, step S2
Step S2
It is also possible to shift to 9 and wait for the power to be turned off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the ON state.
The open state of the front frame 12 may not be a condition. Moreover, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as the condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as the condition.

Alternatively, the setting key switch may not be provided, and the setting value change state may be shifted to the probability setting value change state only on the condition that the setting value change switch is in the ON state. That is, steps S22, S
If the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. 6 without performing the process of 23. In this case, steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 6 for initializing the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for the game control are not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for the game control by ending without setting or ending after setting the same probability setting value. In this way, if the set value change switch is ON only as a condition to shift to the probability set value change state, the structure of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko game machine can be diverted.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a set value change button (set value change switch 151)), and the control means retains the stored contents even in a power off state. Storage means (RAM 111C) capable of holding, and validity determination means (game control device 10) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on.
0), and an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value, and the validity determination means stores the data in the storage means. When it is determined that the information received is not correct, a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is made. Therefore, it is possible to encourage recovery to a normal state. Also, R
When the AM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability setting value set in the game parlor is also lost and the initial value is set. It is possible to prevent a state in which a probability setting value unintended by the store remains set.

Further, the control means is configured to be in a state in which the probability setting value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is checked by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the setting is not legitimate, the notification prompting the user to select the probability set value is continued until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state and to prevent a state in which a probability set value unintended by the game parlor remains set due to initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability set value when the information stored in the storage means is judged to be invalid by the validity judgment means. It will happen. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state and to prevent a state in which a probability set value unintended by the game parlor remains set due to initialization.

In addition, it comprises a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and a production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production based on the information from the game control means. When the legitimacy determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the production control means to stop the control of the game, and the production control means receives the specific information. is received, the notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state and to prevent a state in which a probability set value unintended by the game parlor remains set due to initialization.

Further, when the specific information is received, the effect control means continues the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state and to prevent a state in which a probability set value unintended by the game parlor remains set due to initialization.

Also, a game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, in which a game value is awarded to the player. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operating section (setting key operating section (setting key switch 152)) and the second operating section (setting value A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (set value change switch 151), and the control means is
Equipped with storage means (RAM 111C) capable of retaining stored contents even in a power-off state, and when the power is turned on and the first and second operation sections are not operated, the information stored in the storage means is used. If the first operation unit is operated when the power is restored and the power is turned on, the changeable state is set so that the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means, and only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If so, it means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using a minimum number of operation units, and the work efficiency at the game parlor can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, and the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability set value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting the initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game parlor can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, and the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

In addition, the control means includes legitimacy determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the received information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, a notification prompting the initialization of the storage means is made. Therefore, it is possible to encourage recovery to a normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to enter a changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation section is not operated, the first operation section is operated. This means that the notification prompting to turn on the power is performed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage recovery to a normal state.

Also, a game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, in which a game value is awarded to the player. Control means (game control device 100) and probability setting values to which probability values used for game lottery are assigned are set by a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a switch 151)), and a control means that includes information on the probability setting values selected by the setting means. Storage means capable of storing information (RAM 11
1C), wherein the control means initializes the storage means when the game machine is powered on while a predetermined operation part among the plurality of operation parts is operated. . Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using a minimum number of operation units, and the work efficiency at the game parlor can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, and the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, timer interrupt processing includes:
A periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is sent to the CPU1.
11A is started. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S1
01). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step S104) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed based on the output data set in various processes. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, random number update processing 1 (step S10
5) Random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. After that, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, normal gate switch 34a, winning port switch 3
5a, Winning hole switch/state monitoring process (step S107) is performed.

Next, probability setting value change processing (step S1
08) is performed, and it is determined whether the probability setting value is changed (step S109). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S109; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability setting value can be confirmed.

If it is not in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as processing related to the progress of the game, payout command transmission processing (step S111) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, A special figure game process (step S112) for performing processing relating to the figure variation display game, and a normal figure game processing (step S113) for performing processing relating to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, if it is in the probability set value change state (step S
109; Y), or in the case of the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above-described processing relating to the game. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed.

It should be noted that, if the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, payout command transmission processing (step S111), special figure game processing (step S112), normal figure game processing (step S113) so as not to be performed However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed and the prize balls may be paid out. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability setting value change state, random number update process 1 (step S105) or random number update process 2 (step S10)
6) may not be performed, and the random number may not be updated in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. Also, the type of processing that is not to be executed in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (step S114), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine whether there is an abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
16). Then, an external information editing process (step S117) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer, and a base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 for outputting segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c are synthesized and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
digit line output data (step S144). In this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (eg, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) is sent to the output port for digit/external information output. 136
(step S146).

After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, the plurality of light-emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (
For example, data of "jack signal 1", data of "jack signal 2", data of "jack signal 3", data of "jack signal 4", data of "symbol confirmation number signal", data of "start signal" , data of the "main prize ball signal") and the output data of launch permission are synthesized (step S1
50), the combined data is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information/fire enable signal (step S151).

Next, off output data for the probability setting value display is set as the display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability set value display permission flag is set to the probability set value display device 15.
3 is a flag that is set to allow display of probability settings.

If this probability set value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y),
load the probability setting value display data from the probability setting value display data area (step S154);
The display data is output to the output port 134 of probability set value display (step S155). As a result, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 . On the other hand, if the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the probability set value display output port 134 (step S155). In this case, the OFF output data set in step S152 is set, and the probability set value display device 15
3 is in a state where nothing is displayed.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (step S158). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, it loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability setting values are loaded (step S161). Here, the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area as the test signal output data. That is, the data for display of the probability setting value display device 153 is used as it is for the information about the probability setting value in the test signal to the test firing apparatus. This simplifies the processing, and enables accurate information to be output without changing the information of the probability setting value. Of course, display data may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S162), and if it is not on (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is ON (step S162; Y), the loaded data and setting key switch ON information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. After that, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test-firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out prize balls. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the prize number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). This is an area to be used, and stores prize winning data corresponding to prize balls for which main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed. That is, the prize number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 also outputs a payout prize ball signal to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By matching these two signals,
Unauthorized payouts can be monitored.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning hole (in the case of this embodiment, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, and 14 winning balls). is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning to the winning opening. In other words, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which it is sent. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, 3 prize ball counter areas of winning number counter area 1, 10
Up to 65,535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively. Each sphere counter area is configured to be able to store up to 255 wins.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls is "0". Determine if there is a count number that is not If there is no count (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all winning number counter areas has been completed. Determine (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), step S
Returning to 181, the above processing is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

Also, in step S181, when it is determined that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18
5). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fractional number that is less than the predetermined number that is the reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If not 0 or more (step S189; N), step S
192 processing. If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of output times of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and step S18
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting to the outside of the gaming machine a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as the game balls enter a predetermined prize area. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the accuracy of the prize ball signal generated during the big win is delayed. It is possible to prevent the problem that the number of winning balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of output times of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has reached "0" (step S1
93). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start the payout control immediately, and when the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is on (busy state). be done. That is, the payout busy signal can also be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When this payout busy signal indicates a busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interrupt, a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out prize balls. It is configured to transmit a payout command when it is in the state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed, thereby avoiding unnecessary processing. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to turn on (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shot ball running out error, during overflow error, during frame radio wave fraud, payout ball detection switch (distributed ball detection switch) during abnormal payout error, during overpayment error, during payout control device 200, the number of prize balls to be paid out is counted in the memory of payout control device 200 (the number of prize balls that have not been paid out = the number of acquired game balls remaining). ) (when not = 0).

If the payout busy signal is not in a busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the win number counter area 1 (step S195). Winning number counter area 1
In the process of checking whether there is a count (step S195), among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked has a count number other than "0". determine whether

If there is no count (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all winning number counter areas has been completed. Determine (step S197). In this judgment
When it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

Also, in step S195, when it is determined that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
, acquires the number-of-payouts command corresponding to the address of the target number-of-wins counter area 1 (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and is set to 200 milliseconds as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) is generated in units of winning one prize in the prize winning area, and is transmitted to the payout control device 200 . The payout control device 200 performs control to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. It constitutes a prize ball command transmission means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when it is.

In this way, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, the data corresponding to winning prizes that have not yet been paid out are held on the game control device 100 side, so that they are backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up by the payout control device 200.例文帳に追加Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for doing so.

In a conventional game machine (for example, the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. data to maintain the payout control state. However, conventional gaming machines require a backup function,
There was a problem that it would lead to an increase in cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized even if the payout control device 200 does not have a backup function.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the payout of prize balls can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer. It will be possible to accurately grasp the timing, for example, to accurately grasp the base value. In addition, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball have different transmission timings. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be reliably managed.

From the above, the overall game control is performed, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special fluctuation winning device 38)
A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to a game ball, and a payout control means that controls the payout of game balls based on the prize ball command sent from the game control means. (payout control device 200), and the game control means outputs prize balls based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means is capable of starting payout control output from the payout control means. Control is performed to send a command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, immediately A prize ball command is paid out in response to a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means and continuously outputting for a predetermined period. It means that the data is transmitted to the control means.

In addition, in the game area 32, a winning area with a different number of prize balls (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 3
7. A plurality of general winning openings 35 and special variable winning devices 38) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) determines whether or not a prize ball command instructing game ball payout control is not transmitted for each number of prize balls. is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can identify the, the state signal indicates that payout control can be started, and if there is a prize ball command that has not been transmitted to each prize ball command counter, A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, and whether or not it has not been sent to each prize ball command counter. It means that it is done before specifying whether or not there is a prize ball command.

In addition, overall game control is performed, and a prize ball command is issued based on the winning of a game ball to a predetermined winning area (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38) and payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means;
and the game control means outputs a prize ball when a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control output from the payout control means indicates that payout control can be started A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) that transmits a command to the payout control means, and a prize ball signal (main External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a winning ball signal) to the outside of the game machine
and wherein the external information output means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the state signal output from the payout control means allows the payout control means to start payout control. becomes.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100), when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the prize ball command transmission means immediately is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information regarding prize ball commands, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information regarding prize ball signals (main prize ball signals). Equipped with a ball signal counter (game control device 100), the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special fluctuation A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize winning device 38), and when the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the payout control means (
payout control device 200), and a prize ball command counter (game control device 10
0) is capable of storing winning information in units of one winning to a predetermined winning area, updating when a game ball wins to a predetermined winning area, and issuing a winning ball command to payout control means. By updating in response to the transmission to , it is possible to store the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted, and the external information output means determines the payout according to the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area. The number of prize balls is accumulated, and a prize ball signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, and the prize ball signal counter counts one prize in a predetermined prize area as a unit. Winning information can be stored, and updating is performed when a game ball wins a prize in a predetermined winning area, and updating is performed in correspondence with the accumulation processing of the number of winning balls by the external information output means, so that accumulation processing is still performed. It is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been processed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal when the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 1.
It is configured such that a main prize ball signal is output every time the number of balls reaches 0.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 scheduled payouts (every time the payout command is transmitted).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output for the updated (set) number of output times.
Since a prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 balls are actually paid out in response to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the schedule and result can be matched. Ability to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if you win during the jackpot period, the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc., and even if the payout is made after the jackpot is over, the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning will ensure that the hall controller (hall computer) is accurate. Can collect (judge) information.

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows the winning opening switch/state monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (step S1
07) was shown. In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is changed (step S299). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S299; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S299).
300). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability setting value can be confirmed.

If the probability set value confirmation mode is not set (step S300; N), the processing from step S301 onwards is performed as the processing relating to the progress of the game. On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value change state (
Step S299; Y) or in the case of the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the processing relating to winning is not performed and the game cannot proceed.

In addition, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, it monitors fraud and winning of the special variable winning device 38, monitors fraud and winning of the normal variable winning device 37, and goes to a winning opening that can always win However, one or more of them may be monitored. For example, the special variable winning device 38 and the normal variable winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed either. Also, the type of processing that is not to be executed in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the big winning opening switches 38a in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301). A fraudulent and winning monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the winning opening and to detect a normal winning.

The winning opening monitoring table contains a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraud winning number area,
A fraudulent prize winning error notification command, a fraudulent winning number upper limit value (fraudulent occurrence determination number), a prize winning port switch table address, and notification timer update information (permission/update) information are defined. In addition, the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) is stored in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table
In addition, for each switch, the information of the monitor switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 are defined. The winning hole monitor table is prepared for each switch to be monitored.

After that, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the big winning opening is won even though the big winning opening is not open. Fraud & detection that monitors for illegal winnings and detects normal winnings
Winning monitoring processing (step S304) is executed.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general electric is prepared (step S305), and even though the general electric is not open, the public electric is monitored for illegal winning. At the same time, a fraudulent and winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting normal winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step S30).
7) Performs winning number counter update processing (step S308) for updating the winning number.

Next, update the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose states are to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time (step S309). In the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated from 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. State monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", state monitoring based on the shot ball cut switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", the state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", the state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. be.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a game machine state check process (step S313) for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the glass frame open detection switch 63
State monitoring based on the signal output from is set, and the value of the state scan counter is "1"
, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the body frame open detection switch 64 is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", state monitoring based on the frame radio wave fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), gaming machine state check processing (step S
316).

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. Two-signal based condition monitoring is set up. It should be noted that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 does not define the state scan counter when it is from "1" to "3".

Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is terminated. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is "0", so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing of steps S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows the probability set value changing process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value change process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S401). is performed (step S422), and the probability setting value changing process is terminated.

If the probability setting value is changed (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value turning off timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value turning off timer is 0. . When the probability set value turn-off timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405.
In this case, the probability setting value information is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the above-described output processing (see FIG. 8). Further, when the probability setting value turn-off timer is not 0 (step S403;
N) moves to step S405. In this case, the probability set value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process described above.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability set value has been changed (step S405). Probability setting value changed is a state in which a confirmation operation described later is performed and a probability setting value used in a game is newly set. In this case, the probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

Then, in determining whether there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the set value change switch has changed to the ON state. That is, it is determined whether the probability set value change button has been pressed. When there is no input from the set value change switch (
Step S406; N) moves to step S411.

Also, if there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the work probability set value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0-5. The values 0 to 5 in the working probability setting value area correspond to setting 1 to setting 6, respectively. , the probability setting values to be selected are sequentially changed. It should be noted that, when the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Also, at this stage, only the values in the working probability setting value area are changed, and the values in the probability setting value area storing the probability setting values used in the game are not changed. A set probability value selected based on a confirmation operation, which will be described later, is saved in the set probability area. Also, although the number of probability setting values is six here, it is also possible to use other numbers.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes information on the newly selected probability setting value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value turn-off timer area (step S409), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is extinguished as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, and a blank display is performed in which nothing is displayed, and then new probability setting value information is displayed. will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, when the probability setting value is displayed with numbers from 1 to 6,
A display other than this number may be used as the specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as the display of the probability set value. Further, when displaying the probability setting value in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability setting value may blink as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode after the specific display. The display mode used as the specific display includes a display mode that blinks, a display mode that has a different blinking cycle than when it is not a specific display, and a display mode that has a different display color than when it is not a specific display. .

Also, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the set value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46,
A specific notification, which is a notification that the selected probability set value has been changed, may be performed by the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like. i.e.
The specific notification may be performed together with the specific display or instead of the specific display. Further, the same display as the probability setting value display device 153 may be performed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 indicator 51, and the special figure 2 indicator.

Next, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 (
step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting contact of the human body with the operating handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability set value change process is terminated. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the work probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). This will
The selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used for the game. In other words, touching the operating handle 24 is a confirming operation for confirming the selected probability set value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be used as the confirmation operation, and an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), a command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value changing process is terminated. . In the effect control device 300, the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90
is displayed, the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 emit light, the board effect device 44 operates, and the speakers 19a and 19b output sound to notify that the probability setting value has been changed.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not off (
Step S416; N), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operating section is at the second position, the probability setting value changing process is terminated. If the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operating section is not in the second position, the RAM
A clear start address 3 is set (step S417), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (
step S419).

As a result, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. A timer is also set for outputting the security signal. That is, the probability setting value area, the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the state display area are not initialized. However, the area for initial value random numbers and the area for variation pattern random numbers may be cleared. In addition, among the probability setting value areas, the area related to the change work, such as the working probability setting value area that temporarily stores the information of the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state and various flags, is cleared. be. Therefore, the probability set value display permission flag is cleared, and the display on the probability set value display device 153 is terminated. Also, the probability set value changing flag is cleared, so the probability set value change state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and a command for ending the probability setting change is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) ( Step S421), the process proceeds to step S48 of the main processing shown in FIG. In the production control device 300, based on receiving a command to change the probability set value,
Display of display device 41 and sub-information display device 90, LED of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46
By the light emission of, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notification is made to the effect that the change of the probability set value has been completed. This notification also serves as notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of this embodiment, in step S421, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of the selected probability setting value, probability setting A plurality of commands such as a change end command (a command to display a customer waiting demo screen and notify RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information, which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform the effect according to the probability set value, and the effect of the game according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a set probability value such as different selection probabilities.

Based on the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, The probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery are assigned are set to a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). A setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from is provided, and the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, based on the operation of the operation unit When the display on the display unit is updated in accordance with the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability set value.

Further, the setting means displays, as the specific display, a display that is not used as the display of the probability set value information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability set value.

Further, the setting means displays updated information as the specific display over a certain period of time in a manner different from that after the certain period of time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability set value.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is on (step S431). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability setting value can be confirmed. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is set, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set.

If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not set (step S431; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, the probability setting value display device 153 is set to display nothing. After that, it is determined whether or not the game is being played (step S
433).

During the game, during execution of the special figure variation display game, during execution of the normal figure variation display game, during the special game state, or during the winning state of the normal figure. That is, this is the case where the game state is a prohibition state that prohibits the start of the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is being played (step S433; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. That is, when the game is in progress, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered. In this case, information to the effect that it is not possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode because the game is being played to the effect control device 300 may be transmitted to notify that effect.

The conditions for determining that the game is in progress (inhibited state) are not limited to those described above. During the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, during the execution of the normal figure fluctuation display game, during the special game state, one or more states selected from among the winning state of the general figure may be the condition, for example, the special figure A game may be determined to be in progress when the variable display game is being executed or in a special game state. Further, conditions other than the above may be added, for example, if the operation handle 24 is being operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered.

Further, even if the game ball is detected by the out switch for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing, it is determined that the game is in progress for a predetermined period and the mode is not shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode. good. Further, it may be determined that the game is being played while the front frame 12 is closed, and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered. Further, it is also possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode during the power saving mode which shifts when a certain period of time elapses while no game is being played. This power saving mode is canceled when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as closing the front frame 12 .

If the game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state, that is, whether the operation unit is in a predetermined state by being operated (step S433; N).
434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. Also, when the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S4
34; Y) sets the probability set value confirmation mode flag (step S435) and sets the probability set value display permission flag (step S436). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is started, and information on the currently set probability set value is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 .

After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437),
A command during probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for confirming the probability setting value, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the board production The operation of the device 44, the output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like notify that the probability set value is being checked.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S439). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. in this case,
Probability setpoint verification mode continues.

If the setting key switch is not on (step S439; N), the probability set value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is terminated, and the state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set. And, the command of probability set value confirmation end is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S442)
, the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the probability set value confirmation end command, the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed is terminated.

That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is on, and is ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating section turned to the second position, the probability set value change state is entered.

As described above, even if the setting key switch is turned on while the game is in progress, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered, thereby preventing the probability setting value from being known during the game. , can ensure the fairness of the game. It should be noted that even if the setting key switch is turned on while the game is in progress, the probability set value confirmation mode is not entered. If so, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode from that time. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically checked when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the checking work can be improved.

In addition, although the condition for not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode is set to be during the game, it is not limited to this, and the probability setting value confirmation mode is shifted according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100 It is sufficient if it is selected whether to do or not. For example, in the case of a high probability state, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, it is also possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode when a predetermined abnormality occurs.

Based on the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a starting condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the setting means is a predetermined value when the operation unit is operated. Based on the setting of the state, it is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and the state of the game controlled by the control means is a prohibition state that prohibits the start of the confirmation state. In this case, even if the operation unit is in the predetermined state, the confirmation state is not set. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the indication of the probability setting value.

Also, the prohibited state is a state in which the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set probability value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

Also, the prohibited state is a state of being in a special game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set probability value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, a normal variable prize winning device 37 that can convert between a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize and an open state in which game balls can easily win a prize, and can generate the right to execute the game by winning a prize, and establishment of a predetermined condition. Based on this, a normal game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) is executed, and when the result of the normal pattern game is a specific result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state (normal pattern winning state) A possible normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) is provided, and the prohibited state is a state in which a normal game is being executed or in a winning state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set probability value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, the setting means sets the operation unit to a predetermined state when the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibited state, and when the prohibited state ends while being in the predetermined state, the prohibited state is changed. It will be in the confirmation state based on the end. Therefore, when the game does not progress, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed, so that the efficiency of confirmation work can be improved.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special game process, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 3
Monitoring of the input of 7a, control of the entire processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 3 forming the second starting winning opening
7. When there is a prize for a game ball, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and the game result based on the prize is determined in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the prize. make a judgment.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of game balls by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special game processing timer is "
0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. (step A5), and acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special game process number using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A
9).

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of the big win and the big winning opening of each big win are performed. Special figure display process (step A10
)I do.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, and the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, when the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the big winning opening remains. A process (step A12) during the opening of the big prize winning opening for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. Large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing
I do.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A15) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A
16).
In step A7, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A
19), a symbol variation control process (step A20) relating to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display device 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol variation control process (step A22) is performed regarding the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 indicator 52. , ends the special game process. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

Incidentally, a small win is a result mode that does not involve the operation of a conditional device, and a big win is a special result that accompanies the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of, for example, winning a small prize lottery. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting gate switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, It is determined whether or not there is a prize to the 1 start opening (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning to the first starting port (step A103
In ;N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the first start opening (step A
103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special working hours (during general electricity support) (step A
104).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize is not won unless the first starting port (starting prize port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step A1
09), a hardware random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second start opening (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second starting port (step A111
At ;N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the second starting port (step A
111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which game balls can be won (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A112; Y). , the process proceeds to step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, step A
At 112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (eg, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred.
If there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, when it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), special Performing the figure start port switch common processing (step A115),
Terminate the starting port switch monitoring process. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102
, A110) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process,
First, of the first starting port (starting winning port 36) and the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37),
Set the non-winning information of the starting gate to be monitored (step A121), and press the starting gate 1 switch 3
6a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitoring target starting port switch (step A122). If there is no input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the random number latch register to be monitored (step A124). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if the random number has not been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. Also, if there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A125
). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37), set winning information for the starting opening to be monitored (step A126), and perform hard random number acquisition processing. finish.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, the starting port 1 switch 36
a and starter 2 switch 37a, load the starter signal output count, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the starter switch to be monitored is output to the management device outside the game machine 10 (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of times of output overflows (step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) ends the special figure start opening switch common processing.

Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6), save the target start-up winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hardware random number acquisition process is stored as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is won (step A14
2).
In step A142, if it is determined that the first start opening is not winning (step A142
;N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, in step A142, if it is determined that the first start opening is won (step A
In 142; Y), a small winning design random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step A144).

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Then, to prepare a decorative special figure pending number command corresponding to the starting opening switch and special figure pending number to be monitored (step A147), effect command setting processing (step A148) is performed,
End the special figure starting mouth switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the starting area of the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and starts the variable display game execution right. It constitutes a starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random values stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37),
A predetermined number is stored as the second start memory up to the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, special figure reservation information determination processing (step A14
6) will be described in detail. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, check the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing to determine whether it is winning to the first starting opening (start winning opening 36) (step A151).
In step A151, if it is determined that the winning to the first starting port is not (step A151
In ;N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, in step A151, if it is determined that the first start opening is won (step A
151; Y), it is determined whether it is in the special drawing time saving (step A152).

In step A152, when it determines with it being in special figure time saving (step A152; Y), it complete|finishes special figure reservation information determination processing.
On the other hand, in step A152, if it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A152;
In N), it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153).
In step A153, when it is determined that it is during the big hit or during the small hit (step A1
53; Y) ends the special figure reservation information determination process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not in progress or the small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. Big hit determination processing (step A154) is performed. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure starter switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the first start opening is not won (step A158
In ;N), set stop pattern information of the lost (step A163), step A164
to process.
On the other hand, in step A158, if it is determined that the first start opening is won (step A
In 158; Y), a small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. Then, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step A160; N), set the stop symbol information of the loss (step A
163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit design random number check table is set (step A161), and a small hit design prepared in step A143 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (step A1
62), the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A167).

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A168), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A169), end the special figure reservation information determination process.

Incidentally, the big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. That is, determination is made according to the set probability setting value. Also, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (
For example, it determines whether or not there will be a special result). The timing for determining the random value stored in correspondence with the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A305). And the number of special figures 1 pending is "0" (step A3
05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demonstration has not started yet (step A309; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316
), to end the special figure normal processing. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the effect control device 300 outputs the customer waiting demo command forming the waiting information.
It will be sent to.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
Y) skips steps A310 to A312 and proceeds to step A313.

Also, in step A301, if the number of special figures 2 pending is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (
Step A304) is performed and the special figure normal processing is terminated.
Also, in step A305, if the special figure 1 pending number is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (
Step A308) is performed and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0", special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 19(a), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A321),
Loss information and big win information are set in a big win flag 1 for discriminating whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big win, and it is discriminated whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small win. Big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag for doing is performed.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A
323) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game are performed. Prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328)
, save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (special figure 1 indicator 5
The initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 1 is set (step A33
3). Then, the initial value ("0" in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. This is done with memory as the target.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A341), and the second
A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A
343) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various settings related to the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348)
, save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), flashing control timer in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area (special figure 2 indicator 5
2 flashing period timer) is set to an initial value (here, 100 ms) (step A35
3). Then, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322
) and the details of the big hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the set probability values is set (step A381). The upper limit decision value table is provided for each set probability value, and defines an upper limit decision value in a high probability state and an upper limit decision value in a low probability state (normal probability state). Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A382), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or probability state (high probability state or normal probability state),
The lower limit judgment value may be changed according to the set probability value or probability state. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. to set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), set a loss as the judgment result (step A389), and finish the jackpot judgment processing. It should be noted that the failure in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be determined as a small hit in the subsequent small hit determination processing. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A3
83;N) determines whether it is in a high probability state (step A384). Then, if it is in a high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is acquired (step A
385), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A38
7). Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A384; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A386), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A387) . The upper limit judgment value acquired here is obtained by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A381 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), the judgment result is set to be lost (step A358), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322
) and details of the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The range of the big-hit determination value and the range of the small-hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402
). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if it is a different probability setting value. When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), set the deviation as the judgment result (step A404), and end the big hit judgment processing. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), the deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing ends. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set the small hit as the judgment result (step A405), and end the small hit judgment process. do.

In addition, as in the case of the big hit determination, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be obtained from the set upper limit judgment value table. The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively defined in a judgment value table provided for each probability setting value. Furthermore, the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different, but the small hit lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value, in this case, according to the probability setting value to select the small hit lower limit judgment value.

Also, processing for setting an upper limit setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381)
Or, in the process of setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), if the value indicating the referred probability setting value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, A predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1) may be set, or the game may be stopped on the assumption that an abnormality has occurred, and an error notification may be performed. In addition, although the probability setting value is referenced for each judgment of the big hit and each judgment of the small hit, when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value change state, the upper limit setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value Alternatively, processing for setting a small hit upper limit judgment value may be performed, and only this may be referred to when judging a big hit or judging a small hit.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure fluctuation process, first, prepare a symbol stop command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag) (step A
601), effect command setting processing is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command forming the stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the result is derived and displayed after the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed ends. In the production control device 300,
Upon receipt of this symbol stop command, the variable display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is stopped, and the result is stopped and displayed.

Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is a losing symbol pattern, a big win symbol pattern or a small winning symbol pattern, but the display time may be changed depending on the stop symbol pattern. . That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, as the processing number, set the processing number "2" relating to the processing during special figure display (step A6
05), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A606).

Next, the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the special symbol 1 variation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 during fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer is initialized in the pattern determination number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal Save the value (for example, 256 ms) (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), end the processing during special figure fluctuation.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing (step A702) for clearing the small hit flag area is performed.
Then, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing (step A704) of clearing the RWM jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag 2 area. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and it is a jackpot (step A70).
5; Y), a test signal related to the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot)
Special symbol 2 hit signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, in step A705, as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (
Step A706), when it is determined to be a big hit (step A706; Y), a test signal related to the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) Turn on the signal during continuous operation device operation, turn on the signal per special symbol) to RW
The data is saved in the test signal output data area of M (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is saved in the round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM round LE
Save in the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepared (step A712), and the production command setting process (step A71
3). After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714), and effect command setting processing (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, the design information set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop design setting process (stop design number or stop design pattern)
A fanfare command corresponding to is prepared (step A716), and effect command setting processing (step A717) is performed. This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of this embodiment, in step A718, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is 0 when the jackpot with a ball to be played (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1).
N, a big hit with no balls (so-called sudden hit, etc.).
), it is ON at the time of the jackpot in the time-saving state, and is OFF otherwise.
In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win is a big win with balls, and is OFF when the big win is a big win with no balls.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 470
0 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the large winning slot fraudulent winning number area of the big winning slot (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning slot corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared. Save the outside fraud monitoring period flag in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72).
3). After that, fanfare / fanfare for transitioning to processing during the interval /
During the interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the process during special figure display ends. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes special game state generation means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A706
;N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined that the small hit flag is a small hit in step A725 (step A72
5; Y) includes a high probability variation count update process (step A.
726), presentation mode information check processing regarding setting of presentation mode (step A727)
to determine whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A
728).

At step A728, if it is determined that the special figure is not in the high probability (step A728; N
), load the decorative special command from the decorative special command area and prepare it (step A
729), effect command setting processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and effect command setting processing (step A73
2) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small winning fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Also, in step A728, when it is determined that the special figure is in the high probability (step A72
At 8;Y), the process proceeds to step A733. Thus, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
At 0, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of a small win opens the big prize winning opening, but in order to make the player not aware of the occurrence of a small win, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" is set as the processing number for processing during the small winning fanfare (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, a small win fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal regarding the start of the small win game (for example, a big win 1 signal is turned ON (output with big win + small win) )) in the external information output data area (Step A
737), a signal relating to the start of the small winning game (for example, a special symbol 1 small winning signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A739), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraudulent monitoring period for the major winning opening (step A740).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (turning on the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (eg, the first game state display section 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the processing during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of high probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state High-probability fluctuation count update process (step A743) for updating the value of the area (high-probability fluctuation count), production mode information check processing (step A7
44) is performed, and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the production mode number is set (step A7
45), it is determined whether or not the number of rotations remaining for effect and the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation match (step A7).
46). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes, or may be the same value in any one of the plurality of presentation modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes.
At step A746, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining for production and the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation do not match (step A746; N), set "0" relating to special figure normal processing as the processing number (step A749 ), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A750), and clear the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A751). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752
), to end the processing during special figure display.

On the other hand, in step A746, when it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations in preparation for switching match (step A746; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to step A749. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction, etc. from occurring in

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the normal game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the normal electric winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register (step B5) is performed, and a process of obtaining a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number using the table (step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general/universal game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the normal pattern game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal pattern fluctuation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the general pattern game processing number is "1", a general pattern variation process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the normal pattern display process is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "2", if the result of the general pattern variation display game is a win, the normal pattern opening time is set according to whether or not it is in the time saving state. Or, during the general pattern display process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal pattern per process.
Further, in step B7, if the normal game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal game is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set during the normal game. Processing (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern per end processing is performed.
Also, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "5", general pattern per end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device (step B14), the pattern fluctuation control process (step B15) is performed, and the general-purpose game process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, if it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, details of the general-purpose normal processing (step B8) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the general pattern normal processing, first, it is determined whether the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B301), and if the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B301; Y )
sets "0" for the normal game process as the process number (step B322), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (step B323). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general/electrical fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the general/universal diagram normal processing is terminated.

Also, if the normal pattern reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the hit pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1), The loaded area, that is, the winning random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) and the winning pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is increased. It is determined whether it is in the normal pattern high probability made higher than the normal probability (ie, normal pattern low probability), that is, whether it is in the time saving state (step B303).

If it is not in the normal pattern high probability (step B303; N), set the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the normal pattern low probability (step B304), If it is in the normal pattern high probability (step B
303; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of normal pattern high probability (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306). It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B
307).

If the value of the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B306; Y), or if the value of the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B3
07; Y) saves the lost information in the winning flag area (step B308), sets the losing stop pattern number (step B309), and saves the losing pattern information in the normal pattern stop pattern information area (step B310). , the stop pattern number is saved in the normal pattern stop pattern area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the winning information is saved in the winning flag area (step B
311), set the winning stop design number corresponding to the winning design random number loaded in step B302 (step B312), and save the stop design information corresponding to the stop design number in the general design stop design information area (step B313). ), and the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).

In the case of this embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern high probability is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251", and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1". Therefore, when the normal pattern is low probability, the value of the hit random number is "0" to "250". In addition, at the time of normal pattern high probability, the case where the value of the random number is any one of "1" to "250" is hit, and the case where the value of the random number is "0" is lost.
In addition, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of winning symbols.

After saving the stop design number in the normal design stop design area (step B314), the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the winning random number storage area is shifted (step B316), and the empty area after the shift is set to 0.
It is cleared (step B317), and the number of general pattern reservations is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the process of advancing the ranking of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 by one I do. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done.
Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.

Next, extract the variation pattern random number 3 (step B319), set the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and save it in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B3
20). Then, the process transition setting process (step B321) during normal pattern fluctuation for shifting to the normal pattern fluctuation process is performed, and the normal pattern normal process is ended. That is, the game control device 100 executes a normal pattern variation display game as a variation display game (based on the normal pattern start memory) based on the detection of the game ball at the normal pattern start gate 34 (inflow area). form.
In the case of this embodiment, in step B320, the variable time is set to 500 ms with a probability of 200/256, 1500 ms with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 ms with a probability of 16/256. .

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the process during normal game fluctuation (step B9) in the normal game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the normal pattern fluctuation process, first, the processing number is set to "2" for the normal pattern display process (step B401), and the processing number is saved in the normal pattern game processing number area. (Step B402). After that, the general pattern display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game on the general pattern display device 53, is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B403), and Signal (for example, normal symbol 1 fluctuation during signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404),
A stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (step B405), and the normal pattern fluctuation process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (step B10) in the above-described general-purpose map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal pattern display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded winning flag is winning information (step B503).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), set "0" for normal game processing as the processing number (step B515), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (step B516). After that, the during fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general/electrical fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the general/universal map displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), set the process setting table during the hit (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information (for example, "0 ' or '5') and saves it in the control pointer area during normal per figure (step B505). Then, the value of the hit end pointer corresponding to the normal pattern stop pattern information (
For example, "4" or "7") is obtained and saved in the area of the end pointer per normal pattern (step B506). Then, the general electric open time (for example, 1700 m
seconds or 2600 ms) and save it in the normal game processing timer area (step B5
07).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the normal per pattern (step B
508), the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B509).
After that, a signal related to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (for example, the signal during normal pattern 1 hit is ON) and a signal related to the normal operation start (for example, the signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation is ON) are test signals It is saved in the output data area (step B510), and in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general electric solenoid, the ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B511).

Furthermore, the information in the electric power count area that stores the number of prizes won to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, the flag for defining outside the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 (fraud monitoring period outside flag) is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the process during normal diagram display is completed.

[Medium processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the process (step B11) during the normal game hit in the normal game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal per pattern process, first, the control pointer during normal per pattern is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal per pattern control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during the normal pattern hit is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; N
) updates the control pointer during normal per pattern by +1 (step B603), and performs branch processing according to the value of the control pointer during normal per pattern (value before updating +1 in step B603) (step B604).
In addition, when the value of the control pointer in the normal pattern is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y)
, does not perform the process of +1 updating the processing control pointer area during normal per pattern in step B603, but performs branch processing according to the value of the control pointer during per normal per pattern (step B604).

If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control closing of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer 37 is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B605), and in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B606), and the general electric solenoid 37c is turned off. End the drawing hit process.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607, in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer Save the general electric open time, which is the open time, in the general electric game processing timer area (step B607), save the ON data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B608), End the processing during normal per figure.

In addition, if the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609, in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer
saves the normal/universal power supply opening time, which is the opening time of the normal/universal power system, in the general/universal power system game processing timer area (step B60
9) In order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c, the ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B610), and the processing during the general drawing is completed.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, where the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated and the normal electric remaining ball process is performed. is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (step B612), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B614), and the processing during the general drawing is completed.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, 300 m is set as the wait time in step B605.
seconds, 1700 msec as the normal voltage release time in step B607, 2600 msec as the normal voltage release time in step B609, and 6 as the normal voltage remaining ball processing time in step B613.
Save 00ms.
Furthermore, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 1", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. In step B506, "4" is obtained as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the normal diagram display process, "1700 msec" is obtained as the normal electric open time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal power is opened for 1700 msec because the normal power open time is "1700 msec". The time is set, then the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "1", so the general power is opened for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer during the normal pattern is "2".
, a wait time of 300 ms is set, and then the general electric power is opened for 1700 ms because the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "3", and then the control pointer during the general pattern is set to "4 ”, a normal electric residual ball processing time of 600 msec is set.

Further, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 2", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is obtained as the value of the winning end pointer, and in step B507 of the process during normal diagram display, "2600 msec" is obtained as the normal open time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal power is opened for 2600 msec because the normal power open time is "2600 msec". The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "6", so the power is opened for 2600 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "7", so it is 600 msec. Normal electric remaining bulb processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes a normal pattern game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the normal pattern game is a specific result, the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is opened. It constitutes a normal variable winning device control means capable of generating a winning state to be converted (normal drawing winning state).

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (step S111)
, Winning hole switch/state monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S
115), based on the monitoring results of the board radio fraud monitoring process (step S116), create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, amusement center internal management device, or a test firing test device, and set it in the output buffer. processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, if neither a glass frame open error has occurred (step S801; N) nor a body frame open error has occurred (step S802; N), , the door/frame open signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the security signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, if a glass frame open error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
If the main body frame open error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the ON data of the game machine error state signal is saved. The data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like, is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when starting with RAM clear in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. to process. again,
If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process proceeds to step S810 without performing the process of step S809. .

Then, when magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), when board radio fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), when frame radio fraud is occurring (step S81
2; Y), when general electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or when big winning gate fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is output as external information. Save in the data area (step S817), save the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step S818), and step S819.
to process. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, no magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), no board radio fraud has occurred (step S811; N), and no frame radio fraud has occurred (step S812; N).
If the general electric fraud is not occurring (step S813; N) and the big winning opening fraud is not occurring (step S814; N), it is determined whether the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815).
If the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If no switch abnormality is occurring (step S815
In ;N), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S819) for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and starting gate signal editing processing (step S820) for editing the winning signal of the start gate is performed.
)I do.
Next, if the pattern determination count control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S821). In addition, the minimum value of the pattern determination count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the pattern determination count control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the pattern confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the pattern confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. (step S823) to end the external information editing process.
Also, if the value of the design determination count control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the design determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S824), the external information editing process is terminated.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 32 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, allow generation of display data (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness of the LED and liquid crystal, the volume, etc., and the LED
Hall/player setting mode processing for receiving operations such as changing the brightness of the LCD, the volume, etc. is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, the V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), LED control of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the sub-information display device 90, etc. Decoration control processing (step C18) to be performed, movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44,
Return to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 33 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (
Step C201), determine whether or not the command reception count is 0 (step C202)
. If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, copy the contents of the received command buffer to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data)
can be moved to create space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the number of command copies corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
Return to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
Then, it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23
4).

In addition, when it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
At step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235
At ;Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
At step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during a big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during a small win. and MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big-hit command (step C237; Y), the big-hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

Also, when it is determined at step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), symbol-based command processing (
Step C240) is performed to terminate the received command analysis process.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (
At step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot command such as a pending number command or an error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include customer waiting demo commands, pending number commands, pattern stop commands, probability information commands, error/illegal commands, and model designation commands. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
At step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. Also, in step C245,
If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N)
, the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

Also, a command related to power-on and a command related to a probability setting value are processed in a one-shot command process. Commands related to power-on include a command for recovery from power failure and a command for RAM initialization. Commands related to probability setting values include the following commands: changing probability setting, changing probability setting value, ending probability setting change, confirming probability setting value, and ending probability setting value confirmation.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. Even in such a case, the state may be shifted to the probability set value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized at the end of the probability set value change state, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, during the execution of the normal figure fluctuation display game, during the special game state, or during the winning state of the normal figure It may be a condition that it does not correspond to Moreover, it is good also as conditions that it is in a customer waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is being operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

In addition, although the RAM 111C is initialized when the probability set value change state ends, the RA
The RAM 111C may not be initialized unless it is determined that the data in the M111C is abnormal.

Also, although the probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35(a) shows probability setting values in this embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C takes values from 0 to 5. The working probability setting value area is the same. Setting 1 to setting 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The probability setting value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the probability setting values. Different probability values are assigned to settings 1 to 6, respectively.

FIG. 35(b) shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, the probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6. FIG. Therefore, it is practically possible to switch between three levels of probability values. The rest is the same as in FIG. 35(a). By doing so, when six levels of probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values need to be changed, and the design can be easily changed.

Which probability value is assigned to which probability setting value is arbitrary. For example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be assigned the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (probability setting value area for work) is updated by +1 when the setting value change button is operated, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value change button is operated differs by changing the assignment. order. Further, for example, if two probability setting values are assigned the same probability values as other probability setting values, the number of stages of change can be set to 4 stages, and any stage from 1 stage to 6 stages can be set.

FIG. 35(c) also shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, FIG. 35(b)
The settings 4 to 6 are set to settings 1 to 3, and the probability setting value display device 153
, are also 1 to 3 corresponding to this. As a result, the display of the probability set value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easier for the person in charge to grasp the probability value.

FIG. 35(d) also shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, the setting is all 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, substantially only one probability value can be set, and even if the function of changing the probability value is not required, it is possible to cope with the setting of the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100.例文帳に追加In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the probability set value display device 153 displays the same display. It becomes easier for the worker to grasp that the order has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value area is six, other numbers may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35(b) and (c), the number of values in the probability setting value area may also be three. Also, in the case of FIG. 35(d), the number of values in the probability setting value area may be one. In addition, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be set to 7 or more in order to enable setting of more levels. Moreover, although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the selected probability value.

In addition, although the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability setting value, the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is also changed according to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The probability value of the big hit and the probability value of the small hit corresponding to each probability set value can be determined independently. However, if only the big win and the small win are the result of the special figure variation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small win according to the probability value of the big win. Also, the set probability value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the set probability value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Also, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Furthermore, the probability of winning results in the normal pattern variation display game may also be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of hitting a big hit, or may be set independently.

In addition, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, etc. are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. , the setting sub-board may be removed, and the connecting portion of the game control device 100 with the setting sub-board may be connected to a sub-board or the like that has undergone termination processing such as GND connection. By doing so, only the function of changing the probability value can be eliminated without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and the cost can be reduced. Also, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function, an activation probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the game control device 100 transmits a payout instruction command to the payout control device 200 when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in this modified example includes storage means capable of retaining stored contents even in a power-off state. This storage means stores the information of the payout command received from the game control device 100, and the payout is carried out based on the information stored here. Thus, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. . Therefore, the information of the payout command that has not yet been paid out is accumulated in the storage means of the payout control device 200 .

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, main processing shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when the command (specific information) of setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). Payout control device 2
In 00, based on the receipt of this payout instruction command, payout is started based on the information backed up in its own storage means. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be performed based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and the profit of the player is prevented from being damaged. can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the setting change instruction command, in addition to performing notification to prompt the change of the probability set value, it is also configured to perform notification that there is a possibility that a payout will be performed. can be Also, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is sent to the payout control device 200 is not limited to the above case. For example, in FIG. S40), or when transmitting a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout control device 20
0, a payout instruction command (specific information) may be transmitted.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, Based on the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game is allocated. A setting means ( game control device 100) and payout control means (payout control device 20) for controlling the payout of game media based on payout information from the game control means
0), and the game control means includes storage means (R
AM 111C), validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value. and an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the specified Information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, the effect control means performs notification prompting the selection of the probability set value based on receiving the specific information, the payout control means, the power supply A game medium capable of holding stored contents even in an interrupted state and capable of storing payout information received from the game control means, and receiving specific information based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. is controlled to pay out.
Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to return to the normal state and not to impair the profit obtained by the player. In addition, by initializing the RAM 111C, the information of the probability setting value set in the game arcade is also lost and the initial value is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game parlor remains set.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, a plurality of determination conditions for the selected probability setting value are prepared.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 37 is performed. In this probability set value change process, a determination condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether or not the conditions for determining the selected probability set value are met.

[Confirmation condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the confirmation condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 (step S411), and if there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; ) clears the completion standby flag (step S45
7), the processing of steps S412 to S415 is performed, and the confirmation condition monitoring processing is terminated.

In other words, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operating handle 24, the first determination condition is established with the input from the touch switch as a condition, and the selected probability set value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used for monitoring the establishment of the second confirmation condition, as will be described later. Since there is no longer a need to monitor , the completion wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, if there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, if the first confirmation condition is not met, it is determined whether there is an end waiting flag (step S451).
). If there is an end waiting flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end standby flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S452).

If the setting key switch is not in the OFF state (step S452; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. If the setting key switch is in the OFF state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3) is stored in the change end timer area.
seconds) is saved (step S453), and an end standby flag is set (step S454).
).

After that, if the change end timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the process from step S457 onwards is performed, and the confirmed condition monitoring process ends. That is, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch, which constitutes the second operation, the second confirmation condition is established, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

As described above, in this modified example, the set probability value selected by satisfying either the first confirmation condition or the second confirmation condition is set as the probability setting value to be used in the game.
Until these definite conditions are established, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area storing the probability setting value used in the game is not changed. do not have. Therefore, if the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In addition, in the probability set value change state, by touching the operation handle 24, it may be notified that the selected probability set value is set. This notification may be always performed in the probability setting value change state, or may be performed only in the state where the completion standby flag is set. Moreover, the first confirmation condition and the second confirmation condition are not limited to the conditions described above and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the second confirmation condition may be only that the setting key switch is turned off. Alternatively, three or more determination conditions may be prepared, and a probability set value selected when any one of them is established may be set.

Further, although the original probability setting value is set when the power supply is cut off before the confirmation condition is established, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, when the probability setting value change state is started, the information in the probability setting value area is set to an initial value (for example, setting 1). may be set. In this case, any probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value. It may be set as a set value.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (set value change switch 151), and the setting means is one of a plurality of determination conditions The probability set value selected based on the establishment of either one is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability set value. In addition, by providing a plurality of definite conditions, the degree of freedom of work is increased, and the work efficiency at the amusement arcade can be improved.

In addition, if the power supply is cut off before any of the plurality of determination conditions is met, the setting means
This means that the selected probability setting value is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

Further, the plurality of confirmation conditions include a first confirmation condition and a second confirmation condition, the first confirmation condition being that a predetermined first operation has been performed, and the second confirmation condition being the first operation. is that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability set value.

[Third modification]
Next, a description will be given of a third modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example does not have a setting key operating section in the setting means and does not have the setting key switch 152 . Also, the conditions for transition to the changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the main process shown in FIG. 5, the main process shown in FIG. 39 is performed. In this process, if the backed-up information is normal and the set value change state is not set (step S21; N), it is determined whether the set value change switch is in the ON state from the previously read state of the third input port 124. is determined (step S61).

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 in order to carry out the process for normal recovery from the power failure. If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), transition determination processing is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the conditions for transition to the probability setting value change state are established, and if the transition conditions are satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. .

If the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the process of initializing the RAM and setting the probability setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed is performed. 6 to step S35. In addition, in this modification, since the probability set value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 does not have to be performed. Further, when the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N)
, the process proceeds to step S41 in FIG. 6 to initialize the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is not normal, RAM clear start address 1
is set (step S25), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64). If the set value change switch is not on (step S64; N), a command (specific information) for setting change instruction
is transmitted to the performance control board (performance control device 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power supply of the game machine is waited for.

If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), transition determination processing is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as step S62.
If the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y),
In order to perform the processing of initializing the RAM and the processing of setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed, the process proceeds to step S35 in FIG. Further, when the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition judgment processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62 and S65) in the main process described above. In this transition determination process, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is met (step S72). step S73).

In this modification, the staff puts game balls into the prize winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time period, thereby shifting to the probability set value change state. Whether or not this transition condition is satisfied is determined from the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input. If this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y),
A probability set value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process is terminated. As a result, the state shifts to the probability set value change state.

If the transition condition is not met (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is set to 0.
If not, it is updated by -1 (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). If the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process is terminated. That is, if the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability set value changing flag. As a result, if the backed-up data is normal, step S in FIG. 6 is performed to initialize the RAM area for game control.
41, and if the backed up data is abnormal, step S
28 and S29 are performed and the control is stopped.

The transition condition may or may not be changeable at the game arcade. Also, although the transition condition is to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, it is also possible to put a predetermined number of game balls in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be used as a transition condition. In this case, the condition may be simply that the detection is made by the detection means, or the detection by the detection means a plurality of times in a predetermined manner (the number of times of detection, the detection interval, etc.) may be the predetermined condition. .

Moreover, although the winning area detection sensor is used as the detection means used to establish the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operating handle 24 or the set value change switch 151 may be used. However, it is preferable that the transition conditions include detection by detection means that cannot be freely operated by the player during the game, such as a detection sensor for the winning area.

In addition, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and are used as detection means used to establish transition conditions, and transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is in a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Alternatively, a keyboard may be provided at a position operable only when the front frame 12 is opened, and used as a detection means for establishing the transition condition, and the password entered from the keyboard may establish the transition condition. .

Further, only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the game machine is turned on, the establishment of the transition condition is monitored and the transition to the probability set value change state is made possible. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, the transition to the probability set value change state may be made possible by monitoring the establishment of the transition condition. In this case, a period for monitoring whether the transition condition is established may always be set based on the power-on of the game machine, or when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power is turned on, the transition condition You may make it start the period which monitors establishment of.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, Detecting means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a,
Start 1 switch 36a, start 2 switch 37a, big prize winning switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), Set value change button (set value change switch 151) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation, and the setting means is a predetermined mode by the detection means is detected, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, since detection in a predetermined manner by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed.
In addition, the number of game machines capable of changing the probability setting values at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys. improves.

In addition, it is used in a game in a gaming machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, prize winning port switch 35a, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, big winning port switch 38a) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) In addition, the setting means enables the selection of the probability set value when a predetermined mode of detection is detected by a plurality of detection means. Therefore, since detection in a predetermined manner by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. In addition, the number of game machines capable of changing the probability setting values at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys. improves.

The setting means makes it possible to select the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a certain period after the power is turned on. therefore,
Unintentional change of the probability set value can be prevented.

Also, the plurality of detection means are inoperable by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability set value is changed by a set value change operation unit composed of DIP switches.

A DIP switch forming a set value changing operation section is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and its input state is inputted to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as a set value change operation unit, and the states of the DIP switches corresponding to each probability set value are defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 42 is performed. In this probability set value change process, it is determined whether the state of the set value change operation unit has changed (step S461). (step S462). As a result, the desired probability set value can be set by operating the set value change operation unit during the probability set value change state and ending the probability set value change state as a state corresponding to the desired probability set value. becomes.

By using the DIP switches in this way, the task of setting a desired probability setting value is facilitated, and the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153
may be omitted. Also, a cover may be attached to cover the DIP switches so that the state of the DIP switches is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Also, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch so that it lights up when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be lit all the time, or may be lit only in the probability set value change state or in the probability set value confirmation mode.

Also, the set value change operation unit is not limited to a dip switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary switch. Anything is fine.

Also, the probability set value change state is set depending on the state of the setting key switch 152.
As in the third modified example described above, it may be possible to shift to the probability set value change state by changing the state of the set value change switch 151, and the probability set value change state may end after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In this case, the probability set value may be set based on the state of the set value change operation section when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the set value change operation section at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. A probability setting value may be set.

In addition, when the probability setting value is not changed, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and a monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Also good. The monitoring process may be always performed when the probability setting value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure fluctuation display game is started.
Alternatively, it may be performed regularly at regular time intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, it is possible to notify that an abnormality has occurred, or to stop the game.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The gaming machine of this modification includes a setting key switch 152 and a CP
If the wiring between U111A is broken, the game cannot be played.

In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as a setting means having a setting value change button, a setting key operation section, a probability setting value display device 153, etc. is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It's like For example, as shown in FIG. 43( a ), the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154 .
is connected with Note that the setting value change switch 151 is omitted here.

FIG. 43(a) shows a state in which the setting key of the setting key operating section is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, so that the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being OFF. Based on this, the probability setting value change state is prevented and the game can be progressed. Further, in the gaming machine of this modified example, an LED is provided as confirmation means for visually recognizing the state of the setting key switch 152 . In the state of FIG. 14(a), the confirming means is turned off, making it possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the OFF state.

FIG. 43(b) shows a state in which the setting key of the setting key operating section is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is open and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation section is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on, so that the probability set value change state is set. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes the specific operation information that is input based on the operation of the operation unit so as to be in a specific state, and based on the input of this specific operation information. A probability setting value change state is entered in which the probability setting value can be selected. In this probability set value change state, the game cannot be progressed, and the game can be progressed by ending the probability set value change state.

FIG. 43(c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43(d) shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. CPU in both cases
The input to 111A is set to HI so that it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

That is, since the state is the same as when the probability set value is changeable, the specific operation information is input in this case as well. As a result, the probability setting value is changed, and the game cannot be progressed. In this way, by inputting the specific operation information even when there is a disconnection or disconnection of the connector, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing when there is an abnormality.
In addition, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operating section is not at the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Although the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 here, they may be directly connected without the connector 154 . Also, the sub-board for setting which forms a setting means provided with a setting key switch 152 and the like is the game control device 10.
0, the setting means may be integrated with the game control device 100 by providing the setting key switch 152 or the like in the game control device 100. It is possible to detect disconnection and connector disconnection between the key switch 152 and the CPU 111A.

Also, here, when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is interrupted, the specific operation information is input. Information may be input. Also, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switches 152 and the like within the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output specific operation information.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) that performs control and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for lottery of the game is assigned is connected to the control means, and is set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (set value change switch 151)), and the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability set value can be selected, and the control means prevents the progress of the game while the specific operation information is being input. When the wiring between the setting means and the control means is disconnected, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally changing the probability set value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally changing the probability set value.

[Sixth modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example differs in the conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modified example, instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 12, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 44 is performed. In this probability set value confirmation process, if the game is in progress (step S433; Y
), the OFF state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. If the game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S434), and if not (step S434;
N) sets the OFF state confirmation flag (step S473) and terminates the probability set value confirmation process. This off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state while the game was not in progress.

If the setting key switch is ON (step S434; Y), it is determined whether there is an OFF state confirmation flag (step S471). If there is an off-state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), clear the off-state confirmation flag (step S472),
After step S435, the process proceeds to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, if there is no OFF state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. That is, if the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not in the game, the probability set value confirmation mode is not entered. When it changes to ON state, it transfers to probability setting value confirmation mode.

In this way, by preventing the shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains in the ON state during the game, it is possible to prevent the shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. When the setting key switch is turned on without being played, the probability setting value is prevented from being displayed after shifting to the probability setting value confirming mode due to the non-playing state (non-prohibited state). . That is, it is possible to set the probability setting value to a state in which it can be confirmed only when an operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) controls the control means (game control device 100
) in a state where the state of the game controlled by
The confirmation state is set only when the state of the setting key switch 152)) is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being indicated unintentionally.

[Seventh modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example has a RAM clear button as a third operation part in addition to a setting key operation part as a first operation part and a set value change button as a second operation part. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100 . Also, the RAM clear button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, like the setting key operation section and the setting value change button.

[Main processing]
In this modification, main processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this main process, when the RAM clear switch is in the ON state (the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y), the process proceeds to step S41. i.e.
A RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
46 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (it is in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed to determine the selected probability setting value. conduct.

In this way, by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed, the RAM 111
C can be initialized, and the probability setting value can be confirmed by this RAM clear button, so the operation of RAM initialization and probability setting confirmation can be selected using the minimum operation unit. It can be done in a timely manner, and the work efficiency at the game store can be improved. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced, and the space required for providing the operation units can be reduced.

When the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the probability set value change state is entered and the RAM is initialized. On the other hand, when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability set value is changed. Since only the RAM can be initialized without transitioning to the state, if only the RAM is to be initialized, there is no need to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability set value change state. It is possible to improve the work efficiency at the game store.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM
When the gaming machine is powered on while a predetermined operating section (setting key operating section (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) of the clear button (RAM clear switch) is being operated. First, it is possible to initialize the storage means (RAM 111C). Further, by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability set value can be confirmed.

Also, a game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, in which a game value is awarded to the player. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operating section (setting key operating section (setting key switch 152)), the second
Operation unit (set value change button (set value change switch 151)) and third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) setting means that allows selection from a plurality of probability setting values (game control device 100), storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for game control by the control means including information on the probability setting value selected by the setting means, a closed state covering the front surface of the game machine 10, A main body frame (front frame 12) that can be converted to an open state and an open/close detection means (game control device 100) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the main body frame. When it is detected by the open/close detection means and the game machine is turned on while the first operation unit is being operated, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized. When the opening/closing detection means detects that the body frame is in an open state and the game machine is powered on while the third operation unit is being operated, the probability set value can be changed. This means that the storage means is initialized without putting it in a bad state. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the probability set value when only the RAM is to be initialized, and the work efficiency at the game parlor can be improved.

Further, the control means detects that the body frame is in the open state by the opening/closing detection means, and
When the gaming machine is powered on while the operation unit and the third operation unit are being operated, the probability setting value is changed and the storage means is initialized, and the main body frame is closed. When the state is detected by the open/close detecting means and the game machine is powered on while the first and third operation sections are operated, the probability setting value is changed. This means that the storage means is initialized without any change. Therefore, even if the first operation section and the third operation section are operated at the same time, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change state, and the work efficiency in the game parlor can be improved. Further, when the body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation unit is operated, the probability setting value change state is not entered, thereby preventing fraudulent actions.

In FIG. 45, by checking the state of the setting key switch before confirming the state of the RAM clear switch, even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time, the probability setting value change state is entered. but the setting key switch is on and the RAM
The ON state of the clear switch may be set as a condition for transition to the probability set value change state.
By making operation of a plurality of operation units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention of shifting to the probability setting value change state.

In the case of the gaming machine of the first embodiment without the RAM clear button, the opening/closing detection means detects that the body frame is open, and the setting key operation section and the setting value change button are operated. when the game machine is powered on, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, the open/close detection means detects that the body frame is closed, and When the game machine is powered on while the setting key operation part and the set value change button are being operated, the memory means is initialized without allowing the probability set value to be changed. It can be said that In this case as well, the setting key switch being ON and the setting value changing switch being ON may be used as the condition for transition to the probability setting value changing state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability set value by operating the second operation section. Further, the setting means can confirm the selected probability set value by operating the third operation section.

Incidentally, in FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be interchanged. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing from step S407 onwards is performed to change the probability setting value to be selected, and when there is an input from the set value change switch, the processing from step S412 onwards is performed. , a process for determining the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[Eighth modification]
Next, an eighth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example differs in the confirmation operation of the probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed. In this probability set value change process, when the set value change switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processes after step S407 are performed to change the probability set value to be selected. Also, when the set value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processing after step S412 is performed to determine the selected probability set value.

Here, the first input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time, and the first input mode exists at the time when the pressing is completed. I'm trying to judge. That is, when the set value change button is released for a short time (when the set value change switch 151 is turned off), the probability set value is changed. The reason why the set value change button is released is to prevent the probability set value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed in a predetermined time or longer, and the second input mode is present when the specified time has passed. I'm trying to judge. In other words, the probability setting value is determined when the pressing operation is performed for a long time exceeding a specified time (when the set value change switch 151 is turned on for a specified time or longer).

In this manner, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the setting value change button is pressed. It is possible to selectively perform the operations of changing and fixing set values and clearing the RAM using a minimum number of operation units, thereby improving the working efficiency in the game parlor.
In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced, and the space required for providing the operation units can be reduced. It should be noted that the first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the operations described above, and may be any operations as long as they can be distinguished from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). When the game machine is powered on while being operated, the storage means (RAM1
11C) can be initialized, and by operating a predetermined operation unit,
The selected probability set value can be determined.

[Ninth Modification]
Next, a ninth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example differs in the conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modified example, instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12, the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 48 is performed. In this probability set value confirmation process, if the game is not in progress (step S433; N
), it is determined whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated and the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered.

Predetermined abnormalities can be arbitrarily set, but here, they are magnet fraud, board radio fraud, frame radio fraud, general electric fraud, and big prize mouth fraud. If any of these abnormalities are occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent behavior, and by not shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode when such an abnormality occurs, the probability set value is known to the person who commits fraudulent behavior. You can prevent it from being lost.

Also, switch malfunction due to disconnection of a connector, shoot ball burnout error, overflow error, dispensing malfunction error, and glass frame opening error are not included in the predetermined malfunctions, but they may be included in the predetermined malfunctions. In addition, since the front frame 12 is opened to operate the setting key operation unit and the set value change button, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormalities.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities occurs, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside so as to notify the amusement arcade of the occurrence of the abnormality. Thus, it is possible to prevent the set probability value from being known during the period from when the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality is received until the person in charge confirms it.

Note that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or when the probability set value confirmation mode is started to prompt confirmation of the gaming machine. A device external to the game machine can recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the output of the security signal over a predetermined period of time.

In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is not switched to the probability set value confirmation mode, but when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is turned on. If all of the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the switch is in the ON state, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode only when the setting key switch is changed from the OFF state to the ON state in a state where a predetermined abnormality does not occur. You can do it. In this case, when the game is being played (step S433; Y) and when a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y), the OFF state confirmation flag is cleared.

In this way, it is prohibited to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is kept in the ON state while a predetermined abnormality has occurred. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on in a state in which a predetermined abnormality is occurring, the predetermined abnormality is subsequently eliminated (a state that is not a prohibited state), and the probability setting value It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, it is possible to set the probability setting value to a state in which it can be confirmed only when an operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (set value change switch 151)), and the setting means is a predetermined value when the operation unit is operated. Based on the state, it is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred means that even if the operation unit is in the predetermined state, it is not set to the confirmation state.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the indication of the probability setting value.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormality, the control means can output information to the outside of the game machine, and when any of the predetermined abnormality occurs, the predetermined abnormality is detected. This means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all the problems are resolved. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the game machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to notify the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is indicated. Inconvenience caused by this can be prevented.

In addition, a storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for game control is provided, and the control means stores specific external information for a predetermined period when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started. It means that it was made to output. Therefore, it is possible to inform the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

Further, the setting means places the operation unit in a predetermined state in a state where a predetermined abnormality occurs,
If all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the predetermined state is maintained, the confirmation state is set based on the fact that all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved. Therefore, since the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when the predetermined abnormality does not occur, the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Also, the setting means sets the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in a state in which a predetermined abnormality does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being indicated unintentionally.

[Tenth Modification]
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during a game.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modified example, instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12, the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 49 is performed. In this probability setting value confirmation processing, when the setting key switch is in the ON state (
At step S434; Y), it is determined whether a game is in progress (step S511). If the game is not being played (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, if the game is in progress (step S511; Y), the game is interrupted (step S511; Y).
512), a game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode can be entered even during the game, and the game is interrupted during the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Also, after performing the process of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the set probability confirmation process is terminated. Also, if there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, the game restart is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability set value End the confirmation process. As a result, the game that has been interrupted upon termination of the probability set value confirmation mode is resumed.

While the game is interrupted, the display on the collective display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the interruption may be continued. Further, when the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special figure variation display game or the normal figure variation display game, the variation display on the collective display device 50 may be continued. Further, the collective display device 50 may display a display indicating that the processing is in an interrupted state.

In addition, when interrupting the game, an interruption command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and when restarting the game, a restart command is transmitted to the production control device 300, so that the display device 41, sound, LED, etc. An effect corresponding to the interruption may be performed using a light-emitting member or a movable accessory. Also, the display on the display device 41 when restarting the game may be the same as the display on the display device 41 when the power is restored.

In addition, even during the interruption of the game, the starting prize winning port 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37, the general winning prize port 3
5 and the special variable winning device 38 may be validated or invalidated. again,
The payout of game balls may be continued even during the interruption of the game.

[11th Modification]
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example is designed to output a sound accompanying the change of the probability set value.

FIG. 50(a) shows an example of changing the probability set value. When the game machine is powered off, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position to turn the setting key switch on (t11), and the game machine is powered on in this state. A value change state is entered (t12). Based on setting value change state, a command during probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 informs that it is in the probability setting value change state based on the reception of this command. Outputs an announcement sound during change. Any sound may be used as the in-change notification sound, and examples include a sound saying "the probability set value is being changed", specific music, or an alarm sound. In addition, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are also used to notify that the probability set value is being changed. Also good. For example, the display device 41 may display the message "Probability set value is being changed". In other words, the effect device used in the game is used to notify that the probability set value is being changed. By notifying using the production device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value is changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the staff of the amusement arcade and the surroundings A player can notice this, and it is possible to prevent illegal games from being played.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operating section is turned to the first position to turn off the setting key switch, the probability set value change state is terminated (t13). Based on the end of the setting value change state, the game control device 100 sends a command for ending the probability setting change to the effect control device 300
, and the effect control device 300 outputs a probability setting value notification sound for notifying the information of the probability setting value set over a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command (t13 to t14). After that, a sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

Although any sound may be used as the probability setting value notification sound, for example, as shown in FIG. 50(b), a sound corresponding to the set probability setting value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, a voice saying "probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, other sounds may be used, and specific music or alarm sounds may be used. In addition, the display device 41 also performs a display corresponding to the set probability setting value in the same manner. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the message "Probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, other displays may be used.

In addition, the display of the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 correspond to the set probability set value, and the probability set value is notified. You can do it. That is, the set probability value is reported using the effect device used in the game. By notifying using the production device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the staff of the amusement arcade and the surrounding games can be notified. It is possible for the player to notice and prevent illegal games from being played.

When the probability setting value is changed, external information indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is output so that an external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that the probability setting value is being changed. Also good. Similarly, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, external information indicating the probability setting value confirmation mode is output so that an external device (such as a hall computer) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be comprehensible. By doing so, the game parlor can immediately grasp the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, and can prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, the game may be prevented from progressing for a predetermined period after the probability set value change state ends. Also, the probability setting value notification sound may be output during the period in which the game cannot be progressed. By doing so, even if the probability set value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and the illegal progress of the game can be prevented. When the probability set value confirmation mode is set, the probability set value confirmation mode is indicated by the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub-information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, and the board decoration device 4.
6. You may make it alert|report by the production|presentation apparatuses, such as the board production|presentation apparatus 44. FIG.

Also, in the probability setting value change state, each time the probability setting value is updated by an operation, a sound corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output. Also, other effect devices may similarly notify updated probability setting values corresponding to the update of the probability setting values. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability set value.

Based on the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a starting condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection of a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating an operation unit. device 100) and an effect device (speaker 19a
, 19b, a display device 41, a sub-information display device 90, a frame decoration device 18, a board decoration device 46, and a board effect device 44), and the selected probability setting value can be notified by the effect device. . Therefore, fraud can be prevented in advance. In addition, the production device can notify that the probability set value can be changed. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be confirmed.

In addition, after the probability set value change state ends, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, even if the probability set value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and the illegal progress of the game can be prevented.

<Suggestion production>
The gaming machine 10 can execute a pseudo-continuous effect of temporarily stopping and re-changing decorative special symbols (identification information), and a suggestive effect suggesting execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The suggestive effect is an effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and the suggestive effect may be executed even when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. That is, after the suggestive effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, or the pseudo-continuous effect may not be executed.

FIG. 51 shows an example of the suggestive effect of this embodiment.
When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 executes the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 .
During execution of the decoration special figure variation display game, the display device 41 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. The first standby holding display unit 41b displaying the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory
1, a second standby pending display portion 41b2 that displays a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested second start memory, and a digested start memory (corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game currently being executed A small pattern relatively smaller than the decorative special pattern (identification information) variably displayed in the execution holding display section 41c for displaying information about the start memory) and the decorative special symbol variation display game display section 41a is variably displayed. A small symbol variation display section 41d and a number holding display section 41e for displaying the number of unredeemed starting memories in numbers are provided.

For example, at the start of the decoration special figure variation display game, the performance control device 300 receives a performance control command signal (performance command) from the game control device 100 to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo continuous performance in the decoration special figure variation display game. A pseudo continuous effect lottery determined based on etc., and a suggestive effect lottery determined based on the effect control command signal (effect command) etc. from the game control device 100 whether to execute the suggestive effect in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game and
And, when the suggestion production lottery is won, the production control device 300 is, for example, shown in FIG.
), an execution suggestive image G1, which is an image suggesting that a suggestive effect is performed at a predetermined timing during execution of the decoration special figure variable display game, and that a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and , and an expectation suggesting image G2, which is an image suggesting the degree of expectation (implementation expectation) that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed.
In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect lottery is won, the effect control device 300 is, for example, shown in FIG.
), a pseudo-continuous effect is started at a predetermined timing during execution of the decoration special symbol variation display game, and a pseudo-continuous pattern G3 for notifying the start of re-variation is stopped and displayed.

Since the pseudo-continuous symbol G3 is stop-displayed at the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, the execution suggestion image G1 can be said to be an image suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol G3 may be stop-displayed. Similarly, the expectation suggesting image G2 can also be said to be an image suggesting the degree of expectation that the pseudo-continuous symbol G3 will be stop-displayed.
51 and FIG. 54 which will be described later, a plurality of decorative special symbols are variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device 41, and then the left, middle and right symbols are displayed.
Although the variable display is stopped in the right order and the result mode is displayed, the stop display order of the decorative special symbols in the decorative special symbol variable display game is not limited to the order of left, middle, and right, and can be changed as appropriate. Yes, for example, the order may be left, right, and middle.

Here, in the present embodiment, the difference between the execution suggestive image G1 and the pseudo continuous pattern G3 is only the level of transparency. Specifically, the execution suggestion image G1 is an image obtained by translucent an opaque pseudo continuous pattern G3. That is, an image displayed behind the execution suggestive image G1 is visible (or easily visible) through the execution suggestive image G1, but is displayed further back than the pseudo-continuous pattern G3. The image is invisible through the pseudo continuous symbol G3.
Note that the difference between the execution suggesting image G1 and the pseudo-continuous pattern G3 is not limited only to the degree of transparency, but can be changed as appropriate. For example, a state in which a predetermined image is temporarily stopped is referred to as an execution suggestion image G1,
A state in which the predetermined image is stopped may be referred to as a pseudo-continuous pattern G3.

The expectation level suggesting image G2 may be displayed side by side with the execution suggesting image G1, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(b). It may be displayed superimposed on the suggestive image G1. That is, the display mode of the expectation degree suggesting image G2 includes a display mode in which it is displayed side by side with the execution suggesting image G1 and a display mode in which it is displayed superimposed on the execution suggesting image G1. It is possible to suggest the degree.
Among the display modes of the expectation level suggesting image G2, the display mode displayed superimposed on the execution suggesting image G1 is, for example, the mode shown in FIG. G1), or a mode in which a part of the expectation level suggestive image G2 overlaps the execution suggestive image G1.

Further, the display mode in which the execution suggestion image G1 is superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 may be a mode in which the expectation level suggestion image G2 is displayed behind the execution suggestion image G1 and superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1. Since the execution suggestive image G1 is a translucent image, both the execution suggestive image G1 and the expectation suggestive image G2 are visible even when the expectation level suggestive image G2 is arranged behind the execution suggestive image G1. Further, the expectation level suggesting image G2 may be a translucent image. By making both the execution suggestive image G1 and the expectation suggestive image G2 translucent images, the state of the ornamental special pattern changing at high speed (
Variable display mode) and the like can also be visually recognized.

The expectation level suggesting image G2 includes a first specific image (character image "?") and a second specific image ("
! ” character image). That is, the display mode of the expectation level suggesting image G2 includes a plurality of display modes in which the type, number, and arrangement order of the specific images constituting the expectation level suggesting image G2 are different, and the execution expectation level is suggested differently depending on the display mode. It is possible.

FIG. 52(a) shows an example of the execution expectation suggested by the expectation suggestion image G2.
For example, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the display mode of the expectation level suggesting image G2 includes a display mode ("?") consisting of one first specific image and a display consisting of one second specific symbol. Manner ("!")
, a display mode consisting of two first specific images (“??”), a display mode consisting of two second specific patterns (“!!”), and a second specific pattern on the right side of the first specific pattern. A display mode in which the pattern is arranged on the left side ("!?") and a display mode in which the second specific pattern is arranged on the right side and the first specific pattern is arranged on the left side ("?!
”), and depending on the type, number, and arrangement order of the specific images that make up the expectation suggestive image G2,
The implied execution expectations are different.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 52A, for example, the expectation level suggesting image G2 can be displayed in a display mode in which it is displayed side by side with the execution suggestive image G1, and a display mode in which it is displayed superimposed on the execution suggestive image G1. , and even if the type, number, and arrangement order of the specific images that make up the expectation level suggesting image G2 are all the same, the expectation level suggesting image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggesting image G1. The suggested degree of expectation for execution differs between when it is superimposed on the suggestion image G1 and when it is displayed.

Specifically, for example, an expectation level suggesting image G2 shown in FIG. 51(b), that is, a display mode ("!?" 52 (
As shown in b), it can be suggested that the execution expectation level (in the case of the expectation level suggesting image G2 shown in FIG. 51, the expectation level that the pseudo continuous effect will be executed) is 40%.
Further, for example, the expectation degree suggesting image G2 shown in FIG. 51(d), that is, the display mode ("!?" In the case of the expectation level suggestive image G2 displayed in the superimposed display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. It can be suggested that the degree of expectation that the continuous performance is executed is 50%.
Which display mode to use for the expectation degree suggesting image G2 is determined, for example, in a suggestion effect lottery.

Here, the first specific image (character image "?") and the second specific image (character image "!") are common to each of these two types of specific images, as shown in FIG. 52(b), for example. It is composed of a common part that is common and a non-common part that is not common.
Note that the number of types of specific images is not limited to two, and may be three or more.
Further, common parts common to each of a plurality of types of specific images are, in addition to parts having a common shape,
It may be a portion having a common color or shade.
Further, the specific image does not have to be composed of a common portion that is common to each of the plurality of types of specific images and a non-common portion that is not common. That is, the specific image does not have to have a common part common to each of the plurality of types of specific images, but the expectation level suggesting image G2 can be displayed with a sense of unity regardless of the display mode of the expectation level suggesting image G2. From such a point of view, it is preferable that the specific image has a common part common to each of the plurality of types of specific images.

Further, the expectation level suggesting image G2 is not limited to being composed only of the specific image, and may include images other than the specific image as long as it includes at least the specific image. Specifically, the expectation suggesting image G2 is, for example, "Maybe a pseudo-run?"
or! ? or? ! or? ? or! ! can be changed to).
Further, the specific image is not limited to a character image, and may be a character image as shown in FIG. 53(a), for example. In the example shown in FIG. 53(a), the non-common portion of the left specific image (first specific image) is an image portion simulating both eyes, and the non-common portion of the right specific image (second specific image) is sunglasses. , and the other portions are common portions.
In addition, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is not the expectation (execution expectation) that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, but the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is the big hit result, for example, as shown in FIG. You may make it suggest the expected degree (jackpot expected degree) which becomes. In this case, the suggestive effect can suggest the possibility that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed by the execution suggestive image G1, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the expectation degree suggestive image G2.

Further, the suggestive effect is not limited to the effect suggesting execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
The suggestive effect may be, for example, an effect suggesting the stop display of a predetermined general symbol, as shown in FIG. Here, the decorative special symbols include general symbols (symbols 1 to 9) and special symbols (pseudo consecutive symbols G3, etc.).

Specifically, first, the decoration special figure variation display game starts, then, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the variation display in the left variation display area stops, As shown, a suggestive effect is performed at a predetermined timing, and an execution suggestive image G suggesting that there is a possibility that a predetermined general symbol (here, "5") will be stopped in the medium fluctuation display area.
1 and an expectation degree suggesting image G2 that suggests an expectation degree (execution expectation degree) that a predetermined general symbol will be stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area. After that, the variable display in the medium variable display area is stopped, and predetermined general symbols are stopped and displayed, for example, as shown in FIG.

Here, since the ready-to-win state has occurred in FIG. 54(c), the suggestion effect shown in FIG. That is, the execution suggesting image G1 shown in FIG. 54(b) is an image suggesting that the ready-to-win effect may be executed, that is, the same decoration special symbol as the decoration special symbol already stopped and displayed is displayed stopped. It can also be said that the image suggests that there is a possibility that Moreover, the expectation suggestion image G shown in FIG.
2 is an image suggesting the degree of expectation (execution degree of expectation) that the ready-to-win effect will be executed, that is, an image suggesting the degree of expectation that the same decorative special symbol as the decorative special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed will be stopped and displayed. I can say

In addition, in the suggestion effect suggesting the stop display of the predetermined general symbol, the expectation suggestion image G2 does not suggest the expectation (execution expectation) that the predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed. The result of the special figure variation display game being executed may suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit result (big hit expectation degree).

In addition, the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 54(b) targets the medium fluctuation display area among the left, middle, and right three fluctuation display areas that constitute the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display section 41a. By displaying an execution suggesting image G1 and an expectation degree suggesting image G2 corresponding to the variable display area, the execution suggesting image G1 suggests that there is a possibility that a predetermined general symbol is stop-displayed in the middle variable display area. , the expectation suggesting image G2 suggests the expectation that a predetermined general symbol is stop-displayed in the medium fluctuation display area, but is not limited to this. That is, the suggestive effect suggesting the stop display of the predetermined general symbols may target the left fluctuating display area or the right fluctuating display area among the three fluctuating display areas of the left, middle, and right. It may be intended for

Further, as shown in FIG. 54(d), for example, a suggestive effect suggesting the stop display of a predetermined general symbol is provided for each of two variable display areas out of the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right. you can go Further, as shown in FIG. 54(e), a suggestive effect suggesting the stop display of a predetermined general symbol may be performed for each of the left, middle and right three variable display areas.
As shown in FIG. 54(d) and FIG. 54(e), a plurality of suggestive effects are simultaneously performed by performing suggestive effects suggesting stop display of predetermined general symbols for each of a plurality of variable display areas. can be done. Furthermore, the results of a plurality of suggestive effects (whether or not the information suggested by the suggestive effects is correct) are not known all at once, but sequentially for each stop of left, middle, and right fluctuations. It is possible to continue for a long period of time and gradually increase the player's expectation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, for example, the suggestive effect is execution of a pending change effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display (hereinafter referred to as "suspended display") from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may be a production that suggests.
Specifically, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the decoration special figure variation display game starts, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b) or FIG. 55(c), predetermined timing Execution suggestion image G1 suggesting that a suggestive effect is performed in and that the pending change effect may be executed, and an expectation suggestive image suggesting the degree of expectation (execution expectation) that the pending change effect is executed. G2
is displayed. After that, an execution suggestion image G1 is displayed at a predetermined timing without performing the pending change effect.
Then, the expectation level suggesting image G2 is erased, or, for example, as shown in FIG. The display mode changes to a hold display (here, a star). In this case, the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example,
It is the image which made the hold|hold display of the 2nd display mode translucent.

In FIG. 55(c), the expectation level suggesting image G2 partially overlaps the execution suggesting image G1. , the entire expectation level suggesting image G2 may overlap the execution suggesting image G1, or a part of the expectation level suggesting image G2 may overlap the execution suggesting image G1.
In addition, in FIG. 55(c), the expectation level suggesting image G2 is arranged in front of the execution suggesting image G1. Alternatively, the expectation level suggesting image G2 may be displayed in front of the execution suggesting image G1 superimposed on the execution suggesting image G1, or the expectation level suggesting image G2 may be displayed behind the execution suggesting image G1. It may be displayed in an overlapping manner on the image G1.
54(b) and (c), the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the suspension display (hereinafter referred to as "execution suspension display") displayed in the execution suspension display section 41c and the expectation level The suggestion image G2 is displayed to suggest that the display mode of the pending display during execution may be changed by the execution suggestion image G1, and the display mode of the pending display during execution is changed by the expectation level suggesting image G2. It suggests the degree of expectation to do, but it is not limited to this. That is, the execution suggesting image G1 and the expectation suggesting image G corresponding to the pending display (hereinafter referred to as "standby pending display") displayed in the first standby pending display portion 41b and the second standby pending display portion 41b2
2 is displayed to suggest that there is a possibility that the display mode of the pending display during standby is changed by the execution suggestion image G1, and the expectation that the display mode of the pending display during standby is changed by the expectation level suggestion image G2. You may make it suggest a degree.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state can be generated when the result of the game is a special result. game machine, a suggestive effect execution means (effect control device 300) that executes a suggestive effect (see FIGS. 51(b) and (d)) that suggests execution of a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect), In the suggestive effect, it is possible to display multiple types of specific images (for example, a character image "?" or a character image "!"). The degree of expectation for execution of the notice effect (performance expectation) or the degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result (jackpot expectation) is different (see FIGS. 52(a) and 53(b)).

Therefore, the specific image displayed in the suggestive effect suggesting the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined notice effect will be executed (execution expectation level) or the expectation level that the result of the game will be a special result (jackpot). degree of expectation), it is possible to enhance the interest of the suggestive production.
Note that the suggestive effect is not limited to an effect suggesting execution of a pseudo-continuous effect as a predetermined advance notice effect, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. It may be an effect suggesting execution of an effect, or an effect suggesting execution of a pending change effect as a predetermined advance notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 55(b) and (c), for example. When the suggestive effect is a effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous suggestive image suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed in the variable display area of the suggestion target as the execution suggestive image G1 (see FIG. 5
1 (b), (d) reference), if the suggestive production is a production that suggests the execution of the ready-to-win production,
As the execution suggesting image G1, a ready-to-win mode suggesting image suggesting the execution of the ready-to-win effect and the type of the ready-to-win effect may be displayed in the variable display region of the suggestion target, or the suggesting effect suggests the execution of the pending change effect. , a pending change suggesting image suggesting execution of the pending change effect may be displayed in the variation display area of the suggestion target as the execution suggesting image G1.

Also, a plurality of execution suggestion images G1 may be displayed in one variable display area. In that case, for example, as shown in FIG. A roulette effect may be performed such that the execution suggesting image G1 that stops at a position is the real execution suggesting image, and the others are dummy execution suggesting images. By performing such a roulette effect,
Since it becomes easy to understand which execution suggestion image G1 is the real one (here, what kind of ready-to-win effect is possible), the interest in the game is improved.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A(b), the expectation level suggesting image G2 may be configured to perform an effect in which a predetermined action is performed. In that case, from the viewpoint of clarifying the correspondence relationship between the execution suggestive image G1 and the expectation suggestive image G2, the expectation suggestive image G2 operates based on a part of the expectation suggestive image G2 (partially is fixed). Figure 56
In the example shown in A(b), a rocking motion is performed as the predetermined motion, but the predetermined motion is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a stretching motion.
Further, from the viewpoint of further clarifying that the execution suggestive image G1 and the expectation suggestive image G2 are different images, for example, as shown in FIG. It may include an enclosing frame image (area cut-off image, area division image, suggestive pattern-related emphasized image).

In addition, among the display modes of the expectation level suggesting image G2, the display mode in which the execution suggesting image G1 is superimposed and displayed is, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be a display mode in which it looks as if it were done.
Further, the expectation level suggesting image G2 may be displayed at a position distant from the execution suggesting image G1 instead of near the execution suggesting image G1. In that case, for example, a relevance-enhanced image (effect image) spanning the execution suggestive image G1 and the expectation suggestive image G2 may be displayed so that the correspondence relationship between the execution suggestive image G1 and the expectation suggestive image G2 becomes clear. preferable.

In addition, the positional relationship between the execution suggestive image G1 and the expectation level suggestive image G2 can be selected as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 56A (e), a positional relationship such that the lower dot portion of the expectation suggestive image G2 and the center line (horizontal center line) of the execution suggestive image G1 are at the same position, for example, FIG.
As shown in f) and (g), a positional relationship such that the lower point portion of the expectation level suggestive image G2 and the upper side or lower side of the execution suggestive image G1 are at the same position, or, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (h) , the position (
Alternatively, the positions may be shifted to the left or right from the vertical center line). In the example shown in FIGS. 56A(e) to (h), the display mode of the expectation level suggesting image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggesting image G1, but the display mode of the expectation level suggesting image G2 is displayed. The same positional relationship is also preferable in the case of a display mode in which is displayed superimposed on the execution suggestive image G1.

Furthermore, in the display mode displayed side by side with the execution suggestive image G1, from the viewpoint of preventing misrecognition and clarifying the correspondence relationship between the execution suggestive image G1 and the expectation level suggestive image G2, etc. As for the expectation suggesting image G2, it is preferable to display it to the left of the execution suggesting image G1 corresponding to the left fluctuating display area, as shown in FIG. 56A(f), for example. The image G2 is preferably displayed to the right of the execution suggestive image G1 corresponding to the right fluctuation display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A(e). 56A(g) and (h), for example, may be above (or below) the execution suggestive image G1 corresponding to the middle fluctuation display area, but if it is below, the hold display It is preferable that the image G2 is displayed on the upper side of the screen because the expectation level suggesting image G2 may be misunderstood as corresponding to the pending display.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are cases in which a plurality of types of specific images are displayed and cases in which one of the plurality of types of specific images is displayed in the suggestive effect. When one type of specific image is displayed in the suggestive effect (for example, in the case of "?", "!
", "?", "!!"), when multiple types of specific images are displayed in the first order (for example, "!?"), and when multiple types of specific images are displayed in the first order. In the case where the specific images are displayed in the second order (for example, in the case of "?!"), the degree of expectation that a predetermined announcement effect will be executed (execution expectation) or the expectation that the result of the game will be a special result It can be configured so that the degrees (big hit expectation degrees) are different (see FIGS. 52(a) and 53(b)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest a more detailed degree of expectation, so that the suggestive effect can be more interesting.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the predetermined advance notice effect is to display at least a part of identification information (decorative special symbols) for a predetermined period of time in one game (special symbol variation display game). It is a pseudo-continuous effect that can execute unit fluctuation display that temporarily stops information multiple times,
The suggestive effect is a effect for suggesting execution of the pseudo-continuous effect by displaying a pseudo-continuous suggestive image (execution suggestive image G1 shown in FIGS. 51(b) and (d)). Depending on whether the specific image is displayed or when the specific image is displayed superimposed on the pseudo-continuation suggestive image, the degree of expectation that a predetermined announcement effect will be executed (execution expectation) or the degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result ( It can be configured so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different (see FIGS. 52(a) and 53(b)).
By configuring in this way, the correspondence relationship between the pseudo-continuation suggestive image and the specific image becomes clear, and a more detailed degree of expectation can be suggested, so that the suggestive effect can be more interesting.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific image can be composed of a common portion common to each of the plurality of types of specific images and a non-common portion not common (see FIG. 5).
2(b)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the specific image with a sense of unity, so that the suggestive effect can be more interesting.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed in a plurality of variation display areas based on establishment of a predetermined condition is executed, and the game In a gaming machine that can generate a special game state when the result of (1) becomes a special result, the degree of expectation that predetermined identification information will be stopped and displayed in the variable display area (expectation that predetermined identification information will be stopped and displayed) (implementation expectation)) can be executed (suggestion performance (see FIGS. 51(b), 54(b), (d), and (e))). , a specific image (for example, a character image “?” or a character image “!”) is displayed, and the type of the specific image,
Expectations (execution expectations) differ depending on at least one of the number and arrangement order (Fig. 52(a)
reference).

Therefore, as a suggestive effect, it is possible to execute an expectation degree suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation (execution expectation degree) that predetermined identification information (decorative special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the variable display area. can increase
In the present embodiment, the execution expectation level and the jackpot expectation level are varied according to the type, number and arrangement order of the specific images. And it is good if the degree of expectation of a big hit is different. For example, there is only one type of specific image, and depending on the number of specific images (for example, "?", "???", and "???"), the expectations are configured to differ. is also possible.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the expectation degree suggesting effect (suggestive effect), a specific image (for example, a character image “?” or “! ”) is displayed, or a specific image is displayed side by side in the suggested variable display area (see FIGS. 51(b) and 51(d)).
By configuring in this way, since the variable display area of the suggestion target is clarified, the interest of the suggestion effect can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed in a plurality of variation display areas based on establishment of a predetermined condition is executed, and the game In a gaming machine that can generate a special game state when the result of the above is a special result, a suggestive effect that suggests that the predetermined identification information may be stopped and displayed is displayed in each of the plurality of variable display areas. It can be executed as an object (see FIGS. 54(b) and (e)), and in the suggestive effect,
A plurality of types of specific images (for example, a character image of "?" and a character image of "!") are displayed, and a predetermined identification is performed in the variable display area according to the order in which the plurality of types of specific images displayed in the suggestive effect are arranged. The degree of expectation for static display of information (degree of expectation for execution of static display of predetermined identification information (execution expectation degree)) differs (see FIG. 52(a)).

Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a possibility that the predetermined identification information (decorative special symbol) may be stopped and displayed in the variable display area for each of the plurality of variable display areas. Since the specific image displayed in the suggestive effect can suggest the degree of expectation (implementation expectation) that the stop display will be executed, the interest in the suggestive effect can be enhanced.
In addition, by executing a suggestive effect targeting each of the plurality of variable display areas, a plurality of suggestive effects can be performed at the same time. Furthermore, since the results of a plurality of suggestive effects (whether or not the information suggested by the suggestive effects is correct) can be known one by one, the player's expectation can be maintained for a long period of time and the player's expectation can be gradually increased. can be done.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific image displayed in the suggestive effect is superimposed on the variable display area targeted by the suggestive effect, out of the plurality of variable display areas, or displayed in the suggestive effect. can be configured to be displayed side by side in the target variable display area (see FIG. 54(e)).
With this configuration, it becomes clear which of the plurality of variable display areas is the target of the suggestive effect, so that the suggestive effect can be more interesting.

<Modified example of suggestion production>
Here, FIG. 56B shows a modification of the suggestive effect suggesting execution of the pending change effect for changing the display mode of the pending display (in particular, the pending display during standby) from the first display mode to the second display mode.
Specifically, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B (a), the decorative special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the predetermined standby pending display (waiting pending display other than the waiting pending display to be changed) is changed from the first display mode (here, circle) to an intermediate display mode (here, double circle), It is suggested that the pending change performance may be executed. Note that an expectation level suggesting image G2 that suggests an expectation level (execution expectation level) that the pending change effect will be executed may be displayed side by side with or superimposed on the standby pending display in the intermediate display mode.

Next, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56B(d) and (e), a first character image G41,
A second character image G42 performing a predetermined action is displayed around the standby suspension display portion (first standby suspension display portion 41b1, second standby suspension display portion 41b2). Figure 56B (d), (e
), the second character image G42 performs an action of rotating counterclockwise around the standby holding display portion as the predetermined action.
Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B(f), the second character image G42 performs a specific action of specifying the change target standby display. In the example shown in FIG. 56B(f), the second character image G42 performs, as the specific action, an action of pointing to the waiting pending display to be changed by the notification image G43 for notifying the waiting pending display to be changed. ing.
Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B(g), the first character image G41 performs an action action that affects the change target standby display. In the example shown in FIG. 56B(g), the first character image G41 displays, as the action action, an action image G44 imitating the hold display of the second display mode.
The action of throwing toward the pending display of the change target is being performed.
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B(h), the display mode of the waiting display to be changed changes from the first display mode (here, circle) to the second display mode (here, star).

In the example shown in FIG. 56B, the action image G44 thrown by the first character image G41 is
Although the standby pending display is displayed as it is after the change, it is not limited to this. may be displayed as a waiting pending display after a different image is changed.
In addition, when there are a plurality of waiting pending displays to be changed, one second character image G42
may perform a specific action for each standby pending display to be changed, or a plurality of second character images G42 may perform a specific action to the corresponding waiting pending display to be changed.

Further, it is possible to expand the action range of the predetermined action of the second character image G42 not only to the standby pending display portion but also to the active pending display portion 41c. That is, for example, the second character image G42 is displayed as a predetermined action in the standby pending display portion (the first standby pending display portion 41b
1, second standby display portion 41b2) and execution suspension display portion 41c. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that there is a possibility that the display mode of the pending display during execution may change.
Further, when the predetermined action of the second character image G42 is to rotate counterclockwise, the hold display in the first display mode is, for example, an image rotating clockwise as shown in FIG. 56B(i). (here, an image imitating hands of a clock). This makes it possible to make the predetermined action (counterclockwise rotation) of the second character image G42 stand out.

<Modification A of the game board>
At least a part of the game board 30 (including the center case 40 in this modified example) may be made of a transparent material.
An example of the game board 30 of Modification A will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58(a). FIG. 57 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of Modification A, and FIG. 58(a) shows the left overlapping area in the display section of the display device 41 attached to the game board 30 of Modification A. It is a figure for demonstrating 41L and 41 R of right overlapping regions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 57, an opening 30b is provided in substantially the center of the game board 30, and the display portion (display area) of the display device 41 is visible from the front of the gaming machine 10 through the opening 30b. It is possible. The length (width) of the opening 30 b in the horizontal direction is shorter than the length of the display portion of the display device 41 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the left end region of the display portion of the display device 41 (the left region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 58A) is a left overlap region 41L that overlaps the game board 30 in the front and rear direction, and the display of the display device 41 58A) is a right overlapping area 41R that overlaps the game board 30 in the front and rear direction.
The game board 30 includes a left covering portion covering the left overlapping region 41L of the display portion (overlapping the left overlapping region 41L in the front and rear direction) and a right covering portion covering the right overlapping region 41R of the display portion (overlapping the right overlapping region 41R in the front and rear direction). The part is made of a transparent material. Therefore, the left overlapping area 41L of the display section
is visible through the left covering portion of the game board 30, and the right overlapping area 4 of the display section
1R can be seen through the right cover portion of the game board 30 . Incidentally, the game board 30 may be made of a transparent material at least for the left covering portion and the right covering portion.

The front surface of the left covering portion of the game board 30 (hereinafter referred to as the "left flowing down area 32L") is part of the left playing area of the game area 32, and game balls can flow down. Moreover, the game board 30
The front surface of the right covering portion (hereinafter referred to as "right flowing down area 32R") is part of the right playing area of the game area 32, and game balls can flow down.
Therefore, it can also be said that the left overlapping area 41L of the display section can be seen through the left flowing area 32L of the game area 32 . Also, it can be said that the right overlapping area 41R of the display section can be seen through the right flowing area 32R of the game area 32 .

In the display device 41, as the brightness of the display color of the display unit decreases, the amount of light that illuminates the game balls flowing down in front of the display unit (the game balls flowing down the left flowing area 32L and the right flowing area 32R) decreases. Therefore, the game ball flowing down in front of the display section looks dark. Therefore, when the display color of the display unit is too dark (the brightness of the display color is below the lower threshold), the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit is assimilated with the display (dark display) of the display unit, making it difficult to see. become.
On the other hand, as the brightness of the display color of the display unit increases, the amount of light illuminating the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit (the game ball flowing down the left flowing area 32L and the right flowing area 32R) increases. The game ball flowing down in front of the part looks bright. Therefore, when the display color of the display unit is too bright (the brightness of the display color exceeds the upper threshold), the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit becomes assimilated with the display (bright display) of the display unit, making it difficult to see. Become.
Therefore, both when the brightness of the display color of the display section falls below the lower threshold value and when the brightness of the display color of the display section exceeds the upper threshold value, it becomes difficult to confirm the game ball flowing down in front of the display section. decreases.

Therefore, in the case of this modification, that is, in the case of using the game board 30 (for example, the game board 30 as shown in FIG. 57) configured so that game balls can flow down in front of the display portion of the display device 41 as the game board, At least a part of each of the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R is displayed with a color whose lightness falls within an allowable range (hereinafter referred to as "sphere visibility ensuring color"). Specifically, a game board 30 having a configuration in which game balls can flow down in front of the display portion of the display device 41 as a game board
is used, when creating the image data for the display device 41 stored in the image ROM 325, the sphere visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R. It should be created with due consideration.

Here, the permissible range of brightness will be described.
For example, as shown in FIG. If the brightness of the image with the highest brightness (white-out image) among the images that can be displayed is set to "100", the brightness of the color of the image displayed on the display unit of the display device 41 takes a value from 0 to 100. .
In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 58B, the lower threshold value of lightness is set to "20", the upper threshold value is set to "80", and the allowable range of lightness is set to 20 or more and 80 or less. That is, the lightness of the ball visibility securing color falls within the range of 20 or more and 80 or less. Of course, the permissible range of lightness is not limited to the range of 20 or more and 80 or less, and can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 59 shows an example of the display effect performed when the game board 30 configured so that game balls can flow down in front of the display portion of the display device 41 is used as the game board. FIG. 59(a) is an example of a blackout effect, and FIG. 59(b) is an example of a whiteout effect.
In the case of a blackout effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(a), a medium brightness image Q whose display color brightness is within the allowable range is displayed in each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R. By doing so, the ball visibility securing color can be displayed in at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R.
Also, in the case of a white-out effect, for example, as shown in FIG.
By displaying on each of R, the ball visibility securing color can be displayed on at least a part of each of the left overlapping region 41L and the right overlapping region 41R.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the left flow area 32L of the game area 32 is displayed in the middle brightness image Q displayed in the left overlap area 41L of the display section (that is, the brightness of the display color in the left overlap area 41L is within the allowable range). ), and the game ball flowing down the right flowing area 32R of the game area 32 is displayed in the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit.
(That is, the area in front of the right overlapping area 41R in which the lightness of the display color is within the allowable range). Since the game ball becomes easy to see when it passes at least in front of the medium brightness image Q (that is, the area where the ball visibility ensuring color is displayed), the player can (That is, the game ball flowing down the left flowing area 32L and the right flowing area 32R) can be easily confirmed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, only the background image is shown among the images displayed on the display section of the display device 41. FIG. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), by displaying a background image including a medium brightness image Q, at least a part of each of the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R has sphere visibility. Ensure colors can be displayed.

Here, in the present invention, in drawing control of the display screen displayed on the display unit of the display device 41,
The concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used. Scenarios are, for example, scenarios for background, scenarios for left symbols, scenarios for right symbols, etc. Display effects such as variable effects of patterns are divided into multiple display layers (scenario layers) and prepared in advance as a table. This is a method of generating a picture of one screen by setting, controlling them individually as scenarios, and synthesizing all the scenarios.
Multiple display layers (scenario layers) are categorized for each display element, such as background, left pattern, right pattern, etc., and each independently displays multiple motion information simultaneously or continuously. It is set as a table of action scenarios for switching and displaying effects.

In the present invention, the display elements (display components) used in the presentation of the display device 41 are "background", "left pattern", "right pattern", "middle pattern", "notice 1 character", "notice 2 It is divided into eight elements of "character", "reserved display (decorative special figure start memory display)" and "small pattern".
Then, a scenario table for display effects such as variable effects is created for each of the plurality of display elements. In the present invention, the scenario table includes a "background control scenario table", a "left symbol control scenario table", a "right symbol control scenario table", a "middle symbol control scenario table", and a "notice one character control scenario."Table","preview 2-character control scenario table", "holding display control scenario table", and "small symbol control scenario table".
Each display element is composed of a display layer, and a plurality of display layers are sequentially stacked from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present invention, the display layers include a "background layer", a "left pattern layer", a "right pattern layer",
There are 12 types of "medium pattern layer", "notice A layer" to "notice F layer", "holding layer" and "small pattern layer".

The effect control device 300 executes the effect display editing process (step C13) of the main process (FIG. 32).
, V
A process of drawing in the virtual drawing space of the RAM 326 (that is, a process of pasting the sprite of the predetermined image into the virtual drawing space) is performed.
The virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas from the drawing area for motion management area 0 to the drawing area for motion management area 11, as shown in FIG. Each drawing area is arranged in numerical order of the corresponding motion management area, and a display layer in which a predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL, changes the “background layer” on which the predetermined image is drawn to the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 0.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the "notice A layer" in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 in the virtual drawing space.
Next, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the "notice B layer" in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 2 in the virtual drawing space.

Similarly, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the "left pattern layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space.
"Right pattern layer" when the data in the address area of the motion management area 4 is not NULL
is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 in the virtual drawing space, and then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 5 is not NULL, the "medium pattern layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 5 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 6 is not NULL, the "notice C layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 in the virtual drawing space. data is NU
If not LL, the "notice D layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual drawing space, and if the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is not NULL, the "reserved layer" is stored in the virtual drawing space. store in the drawing area for the motion management area 8, then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NULL, store the "notice E layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 9 in the virtual drawing space; When the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is not NULL, the "notice F layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space, and then when the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL. Then, the "small pattern layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the virtual drawing space, and the effect display editing process is terminated.

Here, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the corresponding drawing area remains blank because the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL, the display layer (in the case of the present invention, "notice F layer ”) is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 10 remains blank. It is also possible to store the display layers sequentially so that non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, store the display layers while moving them forward). Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be displayed, each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, a blank It is necessary to search for the most front (leading) drawing area among the drawing areas, which complicates the processing accordingly. On the other hand, as in the present invention, each display layer is stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen).
Each time a display layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, there is no need to search for a drawing area for storing the display layer, so the processing load can be reduced.

The display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially stacked from the back side (lower layer side) of the screen toward the front side (upper layer side) of the screen in order of arrangement of the drawing areas to create one display screen. Specifically, in the present invention, for example, as shown in FIG. 60, the “background layer” stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the top of the 12 drawing areas is the deepest in the screen. The "small pattern layer" stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located at the end of the 12 drawing areas is arranged on the frontmost side (top layer) of the screen. be done.

In such effect control, when generating a effect screen (display screen), a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen are divided in advance and set as a table, and then they are individually set. are controlled as scenarios, and all scenarios are combined in the form of display layers to generate a picture of one screen and display it on the display device 41 .
In the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 includes, for example, in the "reserved layer", a standby pending display (decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the standby pending display unit 41b) and an active pending display (execution Draw the decoration special figure start memory display) displayed on the middle reservation display part 41c. In addition, in the "small pattern layer", a small pattern (identification pattern displayed in the small pattern variation display section 41d) and a number indicating the number of undigested starting memories (number displayed in the number reservation display section 41e). and to draw.

A background image is an image drawn on the "background layer". 59(a) and (b)
), illustrations of images drawn in layers other than the “background layer” are omitted.
Note that the medium brightness image Q is not limited to being included in the background image. Specifically, the medium brightness image Q is, for example, an image (
preview image).

Also, the game board 30 having a structure in which game balls can flow down in front of the display portion of the display device 41 is shown in FIG.
The game board 30 as shown in , that is, the left overlapping area 41L of the display part can be seen through the left flowing area 32L of the game area 32, and the right overlapping area 41R of the display part can be seen through the right flowing area 32L of the game area 32. It is not limited to the game board 30 that can be visually recognized through 32R.
The game board 30 having a configuration in which game balls can flow down in front of the display portion of the display device 41 is shown in, for example, FIG.
As shown in (a), only one of the left end region and the right end region (here, only the right end region) of the display portion of the display device 41 may be covered. The game board 30 may be made of a transparent material at least at the portion covering the display portion of the display device 41 (here, the right covering portion). In the case of the game board 30, only one of the left end region and the right end region of the display portion of the display device 41 becomes an overlapping region that overlaps with the game board 30 in the front and rear direction.
, the sphere visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area (here, the right overlapping area 41R).

In addition, the game board 30 configured so that the game ball can flow down in front of the display portion of the display device 41 accepts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 as shown in FIG.
The game board 30 may be provided with a warp flow path forming member that forms a warp flow path 32W leading to S. In the game board 30, at least the warp passage forming member should be made of a transparent material.
The warp flow path 32W is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows game balls to flow down in a row, and is part of the game area 32. It is possible to receive game balls flowing down the game area. The upstream end forms an inlet of the warp flow path 32W, the downstream end forms an outlet of the warp flow path 32W, and the warp flow path 32W serves to display the game balls that have flowed in from the upstream end of the display device 41. After being guided to the front of the display section, it is guided to the left end of the stage section 32S. In the case of the game board 30, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), a warp overlap region 41W (FIG. 6
2(b), the area surrounded by the dashed line) is displayed in the ball visibility ensuring color.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 59(a), (b), FIG. 61(b), and FIG. 62(b), an image imitating lightning is displayed as the medium brightness image Q. The image Q is not limited to an image imitating lightning, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the brightness of the display color of the medium brightness image Q may not be uniform. Specifically, the medium brightness image Q
may be, for example, a gradation image in which brightness changes stepwise within an allowable range.
Further, the display color of the medium brightness image Q (that is, the sphere visibility ensuring color) may have any hue and saturation as long as the brightness falls within the allowable range.
The display position, size, shape, etc. of the medium brightness image Q may or may not be fixed. From the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in arranging an image to be displayed on the display section, it is preferable that the display section is not fixed.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 59(a) and (b), the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R
Although a separate medium brightness image Q is displayed in and, it is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, when the display unit of the display device 41 has a plurality of overlapping areas that overlap the game board 30 in the front and rear, by displaying one medium brightness image Q across the plurality of overlapping areas, a plurality of A sphere visibility securing color may be displayed in at least a part of each of the overlapping regions.
In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, two middle-lightness images Q are displayed in the left overlap region 41L. It is preferable that the interval between the adjacent medium brightness images Q is equal to or less than one game ball. By setting the interval between adjacent medium-lightness images Q to one game ball or less, the game ball moving (rolling or flowing down) from one medium-lightness image Q to the other medium-lightness image Q is not interrupted. You can continue to check.

In addition, although the sphere visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of the overlap region, the present invention is not limited to this.
An image (display screen) in which a ball visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area may be used.
Specifically, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. An image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in a hitting game state (a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting) is an image in which the ball visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area. (display screen) is fine.
Further, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 62, when only a portion of the left side game area (warp flow path 32W) of the game area 32 overlaps the display portion of the display device 41 in the front and rear direction, at least the left-handed game state The image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in the (game state in which left-handed hitting is more advantageous than right-handed hitting) is an image (display screen) in which the ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area. ) is fine.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, in the gaming machine comprising the game board 30 formed with the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, and the display means (the display device 41) having the display unit, Predetermined game ball flow-down areas in the game area 32 (left flow-down area 32L, right flow-down area 32
R, warp flow path 32W) is located in front of the display section, and overlapping areas (left overlapping area 41L, right overlapping area 41R, warp overlapping area 41W) that overlap in the front and rear with a predetermined game ball flowing down area in the display section. is visible through the predetermined game ball flowing area, and at least a part of the overlapping area is displayed with a color (ball visibility ensuring color) whose brightness is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (lower threshold value). made it
Therefore, even if a blackout-type effect (that is, an effect of displaying an overall dark image on the display device 41) is performed, the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit has a predetermined threshold (lower threshold) in brightness. When passing in front of the area where the above colors (ball visibility ensuring color) are displayed, it is easy to see without being assimilated with the display of the display unit, so the visibility of the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit can be ensured. Furthermore, by ensuring the visibility of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the stop hitting of the game ball (prevent the game ball from not being launched because it is difficult to see).
The lightness of the ball visibility ensuring color may exceed the upper threshold as long as it is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (lower threshold).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, the gaming machine provided with the gaming board 30 formed with the gaming area 32 in which the game balls flow down and the display means (the display device 41) having the display unit, Predetermined game ball flow-down areas in the area 32 (left-side flow-down area 32L, right-side flow-down area 32R,
The warp flow path 32W) is located in front of the display section, and overlapping areas (left overlapping area 41L, right overlapping area 41R, warp overlapping area 41W) that overlap a predetermined game ball flowing down area in the display area are A color (ball visibility ensuring color) is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area, which is visible through the predetermined game ball flowing area and whose lightness is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (upper threshold value).
Therefore, even if a white-out effect (that is, an effect of displaying an overall bright image on the display device 41) is performed, the brightness of the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (upper threshold value). When passing in front of the area where the color of the ball (ball visibility securing color) is displayed, it is easy to see without being assimilated with the display of the display, so the visibility of the game ball flowing down in front of the display is improved. can be secured. Furthermore, by ensuring the visibility of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the stop hitting of the game ball (prevent the game ball from not being launched because it is difficult to see).
Note that the lightness of the ball visibility ensuring color may be lower than the lower threshold as long as it is equal to or lower than a predetermined threshold (upper threshold).

Note that the display means is not limited to the display device 41, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the display means may be, for example, a display device (sub-display device, etc.) provided separately from the display device 41, and predetermined information (characters, images, etc.) The light guide plate may be a light guide plate having a luminescence pattern formed of fine unevenness by laser processing or the like so that the ridges stand out.
In addition, even if the medium brightness image Q is, for example, an expectation suggestive image G2 shown in FIGS. good.

<Modification B of game board>
Modification B of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 78. FIG.
63 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of Modification B. FIG.
In the game board 30 of this modified example, the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area)
is disposed above the out port 30a, which is different from the game board 30 of the above-described embodiment and modification.
Also, in the game board 30 of this modified example, the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged between the normal symbol start gate 34 and the special variable winning device 38 in the right side game area of the game area 32. It differs from the game board 30 of the above-described embodiment and modification.

Further, in the game board 30 of this modified example, as the display device 41, a main display device 41a
, and a sub-display device 41b.
The main display device 41a (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display regions) in which seven light emitters (segments) are arranged in a figure of eight are arranged. Each luminous body can independently change the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, etc.), and by controlling the light emission mode, it is possible to display identification information (special pattern) for each 7-segment display. be. Also, multiple 7
It is also possible to display information using a combination of segment displays. This main display device 41a
Then, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) are variably displayed and then stopped in correspondence with the special figure variation display game. Moreover, it is also possible to execute an effect related to a special figure variation display game by changing the light emission mode.

The sub-display device 41b is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube).
On the display screen of the sub-display device 41b, information related to the game such as characters for producing the special figure variation display game and background images for enhancing the production effect are displayed. Also, the sub display device 41b
On the display screen, a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested start memory, an image for production based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) etc. Is displayed.

FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the out-zone unit 800 and is a diagram (front view) seen from the front side. FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the out-zone unit 800 and is a perspective view seen from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the out-zone unit 800 includes an inlet 810 and right and left production flow passages 820 arranged in the upper part of the out-zone unit 800, and arranged in the middle of the out-zone unit 800. A middle effect flow path 830 and left and right splash members 840 provided, a lower effect flow path 850 and an outflow port (outlet) 860 provided at the bottom of the out zone unit 800, the middle effect flow path 830 and the lower A pseudo prize winning port 870 and left and right rotating bodies 880 are provided between the performance flow path 850 and the play channel 850 .

A game ball that has not won any of the plurality of winning areas provided in the game area 32 can flow into the inflow port 810 . Therefore, in this modification, game balls that do not win in the winning area provided in the game area 32 flow into the out port 30 a or the inflow port 810 of the out zone unit 800 . In addition, the position of the out port 30a can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the out-port 30a may be provided near the general prize-winning port 35 integrated with the big prize-winning port. That is, even if the game ball does not enter the winning area, the game ball may flow down to the ball discharging unit.
The game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 flows into the left-side presentation channel 820 or the right-side presentation channel 82 .
0. Specifically, for example, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 passes through a back channel portion (not shown) disposed on the rear side of the out zone unit 800, and reaches the base member of the out zone unit 800. Out zone unit 8 from the provided outlet (not shown)
00 flows out to the presentation flow path 820 provided on the front side.

The splash member 840 rotates at a constant speed, and guides the game ball flowing down the upper effect flow path 820 to the middle effect flow path 830. state shown) and
A second guidance state (state indicated by solid lines in FIGS. 64 and 65) in which the user is guided to the lower production flow path 850;
can be converted to
The game ball guided to the intermediate effect flow path 830 by the splash member 840 is a pseudo winning hole 870
, or falls into the lower effect channel 850 before flowing into the pseudo prize winning port 870 . The game ball that has fallen from the middle effect channel 830 to the lower effect channel 850 flows into the outflow port 860 .
The game ball guided to the lower effect flow channel 850 by the splash member 840 flows into the outflow port 860, or is guided to the middle effect flow channel 830 by the rotating body 880 before flowing into the outflow port 860. be done.

The game ball that has flowed into the outflow port 860 or the pseudo prize winning port 870 is discharged to the discharge unit.
A game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 is configured to flow into the outflow port 860 or the pseudo prize winning port 870 and be discharged. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 is configured so as not to return to the outside of the out zone unit 800 (the game area 32).

The rotating body 880 is a disc-shaped member, and is arranged in a state in which the thickness direction thereof substantially coincides with the left-right direction. The rotating body 880 rotates at a constant speed in a constant direction (clockwise when viewed from the right side in the case of this modification) about a rotating shaft (not shown) passing through the center of the rotating body 880 .
Rotating body 880 contains a plurality of magnets. This magnet is for attracting (holding in contact with) a game ball that has come into contact with a magnet arrangement location (a location where a magnet is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 880 to the magnet arrangement location. When the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 880, it is attracted to the magnet arrangement location and is lifted from the bottom to the top by the rotating body 880 rotating from the bottom to the top, and is positioned below the rotating body 880. is guided from the lower effect flow path 850 positioned at , to the middle effect flow path 830 positioned above the rotating body 880 .

In addition, from the viewpoint of making it easier for the game ball to be attracted to the magnet arrangement position of the rotating body 880, suppressing the wobbling of the game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement position of the rotating body 880, etc., the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 880 Inwardly recessed portions may be formed at positions corresponding to the positions where the magnets are arranged. Also, instead of a magnet, a ball receiving member such as a plate for lifting the game ball is provided on the rotating body 88 .
May be set to 0. Also, instead of the rotating body 880, a lifting member that operates like an elevator may be provided. That is, the out zone unit 800 may be provided with a member that displaces the game ball.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, an entry prevention wall 890 (or a plurality of nails) is provided at a position outside the splash member 840 to prevent game balls from entering the out zone unit 800 from the side of the splash member 840. or a projecting obstruction member made of resin) may be provided.

A game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 870 is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). A detection signal of the pseudo winning hole switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning hole switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
In this modification, the pseudo winning opening 870 is an assist starting opening, and when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol effect is executed. Here, "assist pattern production" is
Stop display after displaying a plurality of assist symbols (identification information) on the sub display device 41b,
This is an effect in which the stop-displayed assist symbol (hereinafter referred to as "assist stop symbol") participates in the decoration special symbol variation display game on the main display device 41a.

67 to 73 are diagrams for explaining the assist symbol effect of this modified example. The assist symbol effect of this modification consists of an assist symbol variation effect and an assist symbol replacement effect.
1 (main display device 41a and sub display device 41b).
First, when the special figure variation display game being executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo winning special figure game") is a special figure variation display game accompanied by a ready-to-win effect. The assist symbol effect to be executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG.
When the pseudo-winning special figure game accompanies the ready-to-win performance, the assist symbol variation presentation and the assist symbol replacement presentation are executed during the pseudo-winning special figure game.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the main display device 41a displays a first symbol (first special symbol), a second symbol (second special symbol), and a third symbol (third special symbol). ) is being executed, when a game ball enters the pseudo winning hole 870, the assist symbol variation performance of the assist symbol performance is executed. In the assist pattern variation production, for example, FIG.
As shown in 7(b), in each of the left and right assist symbol variation display areas of the sub-display device 41b, a variable display of assist symbols composed of numbers and the like is started, and after a predetermined time,
For example, as shown in FIG. 67(c), the variable display of the assist symbols is stopped and the assist stop symbols are displayed. In FIGS. 67 to 73, the circle displayed on the upper right of the sub display device 41b is a decorative special figure starting memory display (waiting pending display) corresponding to the undigested starting memory.

In this case, as the assist stop symbol, the same ready-to-win symbol as the to-win symbol to be derived in the pseudo winning special game is displayed. The ready-to-win symbols derived in the pseudo-winning special game are, for example, the stop symbols of the pseudo-winning special game determined at the start of the pseudo-winning special game (step of variable effect setting processing (FIG. 77) C522 reference). Specifically, for example, when the stop symbol of the pseudo winning special game is determined to be "757", for example, as shown in FIG. 67(c), "77" is displayed as the assist stop symbol. be.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the variable display of two of the first to third symbols (in this example, the first and second symbols) is stopped, and the remaining one (in this example, Then, when only the third symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, the assist symbol replacement effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol replacement effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 68(c), one of the first to third symbols is stopped and displayed. Two symbols (in this example, the first symbol and the second symbol) are replaced with the assist stop symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 68, "76" is replaced with "77". and,
When the assist stop symbol shifts from the sub-display device 41b to the main display device 41a, the assist symbol effect is terminated and the ready-to-win effect is started.
Thus, in the assist symbol production of this modification, when the assist stop symbols are aligned in the assist symbol variation production, it is as if the assist stop symbols assisted the occurrence of reach in the subsequent assist symbol replacement production. I can show you.

Next, when the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is not a special figure variation display game accompanied by a ready-to-win effect, the special figure variation corresponding to the special figure start memory that has not been digested at the time when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 The assist symbol effect executed when the display game includes the special symbol variation display game accompanied by the reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG.
If the special game at the time of pseudo-winning does not involve a ready-to-win effect, and if the game with a ready-to-win effect is included in the unspent special-figure fluctuation display game, assist symbols during the special game at the time of pseudo-winning A variation performance is executed, and an assist symbol replacement performance is executed during a special figure variation display game (a special figure variation display game accompanied by a ready-to-win performance) performed after the pseudo winning special game. That is, one assist symbol effect is executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG.
When the game ball enters the pseudo winning hole 870 while the variable display of the third symbol is being executed,
Assist symbol variation performance of the assist symbol performance is executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), assist symbol variation display is started, and after a predetermined time, an assist stop symbol is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(c).
In this case, among the ready-to-win symbols in which two symbols are aligned, the non-variable ready-to-win symbols are displayed as the assist stop symbols. Specifically, for example, odd-numbered symbols (“1”, “3”
, "5", "7") are probability variation patterns, and even patterns among the identification patterns ("2", "4", "
6”, “8”) are non-variable symbols, “22”, “44” as assist stop symbols.
", "66", or "88" is set.

The reach pattern derived in the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) performed after the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is, for example, the special figure variation display game determined at the start of the It can be specified based on the stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game (see step C522 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 77)). During the special game at the time of pseudo winning, since the stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game that is performed after the special game at the time of pseudo winning is not determined, during the special game at the time of pseudo winning, the special game at the time of pseudo winning In the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game with reach effect) that is performed after the special figure game, the probability reach pattern is derived (the probability probability becomes reach), or the non-probability reach pattern It is unknown whether is derived (it becomes a reach with a non-variable pattern). Therefore, in this modification, in this case, non-variable ready-to-win symbols are displayed as assist stop symbols in order not to reduce the interest in the game.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is finished, and as shown in FIG.
As shown in (c), two of the first to third patterns (first and second patterns in this example)
stops and only the remaining one symbol (in this example, the third symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, the assist symbol replacement effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol replacement effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 71(b), one of the first to third symbols is stopped and displayed. are replaced by the assist stop symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 71, "76" is replaced with "44". Then, the assist stop pattern is displayed on the main display device 4 from the sub display device 41b.
When the game shifts to 1a, the assist symbol effect is terminated and the ready-to-win effect is started.

Therefore, if the assist stop pattern and the reach pattern derived in the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game with reach effect) performed after the special game at the time of pseudo winning are different, for example As shown in 71(c), the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced with the ready-to-win symbol derived in the special figure variation display game. In the example shown in FIG. 71, "44" is replaced with "77".
As described above, in the assist symbol effect of the present modification, the special symbol game at the time of pseudo-winning is not accompanied by the ready-to-win effect, and the game accompanied by the ready-to-win effect is included in the undigested special symbol fluctuation display game. In this case, the assist stop symbols can be left in a complete state until the special figure fluctuation display game performed after the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning. As a result, it is possible to continue the expectation of reach generation over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games, so that it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Next, when the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is not a special figure variation display game accompanied by a ready-to-win effect, the special figure variation corresponding to the special figure start memory that has not been digested at the time when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 The assist symbol effect executed when the display game does not include the special symbol variation display game accompanied by the reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG.
If the pseudo-winning special game does not involve a ready-to-win effect, and if the game with a ready-to-win effect is not included in the uncompleted special-figure fluctuation display games, assist during the pseudo-winning special game Only the pattern variation performance is executed, and the assist pattern performance ends as it is. That is, in this case, the assist symbol replacement effect is not executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG.
When the game ball enters the pseudo winning hole 870 while the variable display of the third symbol is being executed,
Assist symbol variation performance of the assist symbol performance is executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(b), assist symbol variation display is started, and after a predetermined time, an assist stop symbol is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(c). In this case, a non-ready-to-reach symbol in which two symbols are not aligned is displayed as the assist stop symbol.
After that, as shown in FIG. 73(a), for example, when the pseudo winning special game ends, the assist symbol effect ends, and the assist stop symbol disappears, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(b). Therefore, during the special figure fluctuation display game that is performed after the special figure game at the time of the pseudo prize,
When the game ball enters the pseudo winning hole 870 again, a new assist symbol effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(c).

In this way, in the assist symbol variation effect of this modification, there is a "reach mode" in which two symbols are displayed as the assist stop symbol, and a non-reach symbol in which two symbols are not aligned as the assist stop symbol. There are two production modes, "no reach mode" where is displayed. Then, it is possible to notify (suggest) whether or not the ready-to-win effect will occur depending on the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect.

[Main processing]
In order to execute the assist symbol effect, the effect control device 300 of this modified example executes the main process shown in FIG. 74 instead of the main process shown in FIG.
In the main process of this modification, the assist symbol control process (step C31) is executed between the hole/player setting mode process (step C10) and the random number update process (step C11).

[Assist symbol control process]
FIG. 75 shows the assist symbol control process (step C31) in the main process described above. In this assist symbol control process, first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo winning opening switch has detected a game ball (step C401).
In step C401, if it is determined that the pseudo winning opening switch has not detected the game ball (
Step C401; N), that is, when the game ball has not flowed into the pseudo winning hole 870, the assist symbol control process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step C401, if it is determined that the pseudo winning opening switch has detected a game ball (
Step C401; Y), that is, when the game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning hole 870, it is determined whether or not the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C402).

In step C402, when it is determined that the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C402; Y), that is, in a state where the assist stop symbols are complete, the special figure fluctuation display game is performed after the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning. If it remains until, the assist symbol control process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step C402, when it is determined that the replacement effect standby flag is not set (step C402; N), it is determined whether the P machine state is in the special figure fluctuation (step C
403).
At step C403, when it is determined that the special figure is not fluctuating (step C403; N), the assist symbol control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step C403, if it is determined that it is during special figure fluctuation (step C403; Y
), it is determined whether or not the assist symbol variation effect among the assist symbol effects can be executed (step C404). Specifically, for example, in the middle of the first half variation in the pseudo-winning special game, and when the remaining time of the first half variation is equal to or greater than a predetermined first threshold value, the assist symbol variation effect can be executed. Determine that there is. Here, the predetermined first threshold can be set as appropriate, but in this modification, [1] the execution time of the assist symbol variation effect can be secured (in this modification, the assist symbol variation effect is performed at the time of pseudo winning Start during the first half fluctuation in the special game and end during the first half fluctuation), [2] Securing the processing time to replace part of the special game effect with the assist symbol effect at the time of pseudo-winning A value is set that satisfies both of the two conditions that it is possible.
Information on the first half variation is included in the MODE, and the effect control device 300 can set the contents of the first half variation, the time of the first half variation, and the like based on this MODE.
In addition, the information of the latter half fluctuation such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach is included in the ACT, and the effect control device 300 can set the contents of the latter half fluctuation based on this ACT.

When it is determined in step C404 that the assist symbol variation effect cannot be executed (step C404; N), the assist symbol control process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step C404, if it is determined that the assist symbol variation effect can be executed (
In step C404; Y), it is determined whether or not the variation during digestion (the special figure variation display game being executed, here, the special figure variation display game during pseudo prize winning) is a special figure variation display game accompanied by a ready-to-win effect (step C405). .

In step C405, when it is determined that the variation during digestion is a special figure variation display game with ready-to-win effect (step C405; Y), the content of assist symbol variation effect (with ready-to-win mode) is determined (step C406). . As a result, the execution time of the assist symbol variation effect, the assist stop symbol, and the like are determined.
Next, based on the contents determined in step C406, the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed (step C407). As a result, the assist symbol variation display is started, and after a predetermined time, the assist symbol variation performance (see FIGS. 67B and 67C) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed can be executed.

Next, with reference to the content of the assist symbol variation effect determined in step C406 and the content of the effect in the in-digestion variation currently set to be displayed, etc., the content of the assist symbol replacement effect is determined (step C408). From this, the execution time of the assist symbol replacement performance, the replacement timing of the assist stop symbol, and the like are determined. Here, the content of the currently displayed and set effect for the ingestion variation is, for example, the content of the variation effect set to be displayed in step C523 of the variation effect setting process for the ingestion variation (see FIG. 77), or the content of the variation effect set to be displayed in step C5.
24, and the contents of the decoration special figure fluctuation production (decoration special figure fluctuation display game) set to be displayed in step C527.

Next, based on the content determined in step C408, the display setting of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed (step C409). As a result, at least a part of the effect of the change during digestion (special game at the time of pseudo winning) is replaced with the assist symbol replacement effect. An assist symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 68(a) to 68(c)) in which the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed and the non-reach symbol on the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol can be executed.

Also, in step C405, if it is determined that the in-digestion fluctuation is not a special figure fluctuation display game accompanied by a ready-to-win effect (step C405; N), the undigested fluctuation (special figure fluctuation corresponding to the undigested special figure start memory It is determined whether a special figure variation display game with a reach effect is included in the display game (here, a special figure variation display game performed after the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning) is included (
Step C410). Whether or not the undigested fluctuations include a special figure fluctuation display game accompanied by a ready-to-win effect can be determined, for example, based on the prefetch result from the game control device 100 . Here, the look-ahead result is the determination result of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory, and the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

In step C410, if it is determined that the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect is not included in the undigested variation (step C410; N), the content of the assist symbol variation effect (no reach mode) is determined. (step C411), and based on the determined content, the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed (step C412). As a result, the assist symbol variation display is started, and after a predetermined time, the assist symbol variation effect (
72(b) and (c)) can be executed, and the assist symbol effect ends without execution of the assist symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 73(a) and (b)).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C410 that the special figure variation display game accompanied by the ready-to-win effect is included in the undigested variation (step C410; Y), the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is changed to the ready-to-win mode. A lottery process with reach (step C413) is performed to determine whether to make a lottery, and it is determined whether the lottery has been won (step C414)
.
At step C414, when it is determined that the winning has not been made (step C414; N), that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is the non-reach mode, the process proceeds to step C411. In this way, in this modification, even if the special figure variation display game accompanied by the ready-to-win effect is included in the undigested variation, if the lottery with the ready-to-win mode is not won, the pseudo-winning Only the assist symbol variation performance is executed during the special game, and the assist symbol performance ends as it is. That is, when the assist symbol variation effect of the ready-to-win mode is executed, the assist symbol replacement effect is executed after that, whereas when the assist symbol change effect of the non-reach mode is executed, after that Assist symbol replacement effect is not executed.

On the other hand, in step C414, when it is determined that the lottery has been won (step C414; Y), that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is to be in the ready mode, the assist symbol change effect (with reach mode) is determined. The content is determined (step C415), and the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is set based on the determined content (step C416). As a result, the assist symbol variation display is started, and the assist symbol variation performance (see FIGS. 69B and 69C) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed.
Then, a replacement effect standby flag is set (step C417), and the assist symbol control process is terminated. As a result, in the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) performed after the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning, the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a, and the assist stop symbol is displayed. It is enlarged and displayed, the non-reach pattern on the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop pattern, and if necessary, the assist stop pattern displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced (replaced with the actual reach pattern).
Assist symbol replacement effect (see FIG. 70(c) and FIGS. 71(a) to (c)) can be executed.

[Processing of variable commands]
The received command check processing in the main processing (see FIG. 74) of this modified example is the same as the received command check processing (see FIG. 33) of the above embodiment. Also, the received command analysis processing in the received command check processing of this modified example is the same as the received command analysis processing of the above embodiment (see FIG. 34).

FIG. 76 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing.
showed that. In this variation command process, first, determine whether the special figure type is undetermined (
Step C501). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2,
This is the information set in the pattern-based command process described above.
If this special figure type is undecided (step C501; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C501; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, check the combination of the variation command and the symbol command (
Step C502), it is determined whether the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C
503).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C503; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C5
03;N) discriminates the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C504). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a lost pattern, a 16R probability variable A jackpot pattern, a 16R probability variable B jackpot pattern, a 16R normal A jackpot pattern, a 16R normal B jackpot pattern, and an 8R probability variable jackpot pattern. be. When the variation command and the pattern type are inconsistent, an effect is performed like when the pattern command of the 16R probability variation A jackpot pattern is received although the variation command (variation pattern command) is received. A combination that contradicts the above (
It means that it is a combination of variation command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C504), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variable effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect corresponding to the variable command is performed (step C505).

Next, the special figure fluctuation is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C506
). Here, "during special figure fluctuation" means that the special figure is fluctuating (not during a demonstration waiting for customers, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Further, if the number of look-ahead effects (the number of look-ahead execution times) is not zero, the number of look-ahead effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of look-ahead effects by 1) (step C507), and the variable command process is terminated.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 77 shows the variable effect setting process (step C505) in the variable command process described above.
)showed that. In this fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type is reachless fluctuation (step C511). If the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (
Step C511; Y) sets the model code, the special figure type, and the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the production mode (step C512). In addition, since there is no reach fluctuation, the symbol type is always a lost symbol, and the symbol type need not be particularly referred to here.
Here, the production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300, and naturally differs depending on the model, but in this modified example, there are a normal mode, a probability variable mode, a time saving mode, and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the allocation rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41 (main display device 41a) are different.

Next, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, MODE, acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special figure type (step C513)
. As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery content of the announcement effect that appears during each fluctuation (specifically, the appearance rate of each announcement effect mode) according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half advance notice distribution group table (step C516).

On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C511; N), the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type are set (step C514).
Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is obtained (step C515).
A lottery for the advance notice that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half advance notice distribution group table (step C516).

Next, the advance notice effect of the second half fluctuation is drawn by lottery. In addition, the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is the so-called reach action (for example, the display area excluding the specific area among the display areas of multiple rows of special figures fluctuates in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area becomes a big hit. This is a variable display in which the display is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half variation of the special figure variation display game is the variation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the late notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C517). The second half advance notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table.
Then, referring to the second half advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is obtained (step C518), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for the notice to appear is performed (step C51
9).

Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the results of the advance notice lottery performed in steps C516 and C519 is determined (step C520), and the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C521). As a result, the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the production and notice such as the main reach content are determined.
Then, referring to the determined special figure variation display game variation pattern (such as reach effect) and the content of the notice, stop symbol setting processing for determining the stop symbol constituting the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed ( Step C522).

Next, based on the content of the variable performance determined at step C521, the display setting of the variable performance is performed (step C523), and the display setting of the notice performance is performed based on the content of the performance determined at step C520 (step C524). . By these processes, it is possible to execute the effect and notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above.
Then, the display setting of the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C525). In this process, setting is made to reduce the decorative special figure starting memory display in response to the decrease in the starting memory associated with the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, set the audio number indicating the type of BGM output from the speakers 19a and 19b and the decoration number indicating the type of effect by decoration lamps (step C526), and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure type Display settings are made (step C527).
Next, apart from the decorative special figure variation display game (variation display game displayed with the first to third symbols on the display device 41 (main display device 41a)), the variation displayed with the fourth symbol on the information display device 48 In order to execute the display game, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C528).
Then, effect replacement processing (step C529) is performed, and the variable effect setting process is terminated.

[Production replacement processing]
FIG. 78 shows the effect replacement process (step C529) in the variable effect setting process described above. In this effect replacement process, first, it is determined whether or not the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C531).
At step C531, when it is determined that the replacement effect standby flag is not set (step C531; N), the effect replacement process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step C531, if it is determined that the replacement effect standby flag is set (
Step C531; Y), that is, in a state in which the assist stop symbols are complete, and if the game remains until the special figure variation display game that is performed after the special figure game at the time of pseudo-award winning, the variation pattern type is variation with reach. (step C532).
In step C532, when it is determined that there is no reach variation (step C532; N)
, the effect replacement process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step C532, if it is determined that there is reach variation (step C532
;Y) refers to the assist stop symbol currently displayed on the sub-display device 41b, the details of the effect displayed in the most recent step C523, C524, C527, etc., and the content of the assist symbol replacement effect. is determined (step C533), and the display setting of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed based on the determined content (step C534). As a result, at least part of the effect set to be displayed in the most recent steps C523, C524, C527, etc. is replaced with the assist symbol replacement effect, so the special figure fluctuation display game ( In a special figure variation display game with a reach effect), the main display device 4
The non-reach pattern is stopped and displayed on 1a, the assist stop pattern is enlarged and displayed, the non-reach pattern on the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop pattern, and if necessary, the assist displayed on the main display device 41a. An assist symbol replacement effect (see FIG. 70(c) and FIGS. 71(a) to (c)) in which the stop symbol is replaced (replaced with the actual ready-to-win symbol) can be executed.
Then, the replacement effect standby flag is cleared (step C535), and the effect replacement process is terminated.

In addition, in this modification, when the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is a special figure variation display game accompanied by the ready-to-win effect, it is configured to execute the assist symbol variation effect in the ready-to-win mode, but it is limited to this. is not. For example, even when the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is a special figure variation display game accompanied by a ready-to-win effect, lottery processing in a ready-to-win mode is performed, and when winning the lottery in a ready-to-win mode, assist pattern variation in a ready-to-win mode. It is also possible to execute the effect and to execute the assist symbol variation effect of the non-reach mode when the lottery with the reach mode is not won.
In addition, the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is a special figure variation display game accompanied by a ready-to-win effect, and the special figure variation display game corresponds to the special figure start memory that has not been digested when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870. If a special figure fluctuation display game with a reach effect is included in the, the assist symbol replacement effect may be executed during the special game at the time of the pseudo winning, or after the special game at the time of the pseudo winning The assist symbol replacement effect may be executed during the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) being performed.

Further, in this modification, even if the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of this modification [1] replacement effect standby flag is not set,
[2] The P machine state is in special figure fluctuation, [3] Assist symbol variation effect can be executed) Only when all three conditions are satisfied), execute the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow However, it is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870 in a state in which a predetermined condition is not satisfied, the execution of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is suspended, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it is also possible to configure so as to execute the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow. Moreover, when suspending the execution of the assist design effect, the number of suspensions (the number of assistance suspensions) may be displayed on the sub-display device 41b so as to be distinguishable from the decoration special figure start memory display.

In addition, the assist pattern effect is not limited to the effect of notifying (suggesting) the presence or absence of the reach effect by the assist stop pattern, and the effect other than the reach effect (SP reach development effect, round promotion effect, pseudo continuous change The presence or absence of the occurrence of the production etc.) may be notified (suggested) by the assist stop symbol.
Further, the assist symbol effect is not limited to the effect of informing the presence or absence of the occurrence of the predetermined effect by means of the assist stop symbol, and can be changed as appropriate. The assist symbol effect may be, for example, an effect in which the assist stop symbol is reflected in a predetermined notice effect executed outside the assist symbol variation display area of the sub-display device 41b.

In addition, in this modification, the assist symbol effect is executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870, but the effect executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870 is limited to the assist symbol effect. are not required and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870, it is also possible to execute an effect of operating a predetermined movable body (for example, the spring member 840 and/or the rotating body 880).
Also, a state in which a predetermined condition is established (in the case of this modification [1] replacement effect standby flag is not set, [2] P machine state is in special figure fluctuation, [3] assist symbol variation effect can be executed), when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is executed, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied. When the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870 in the state, instead of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow, the effect other than the assist symbol effect (for example, the effect of operating a predetermined movable body) is executed. It is also possible to configure

Also, it is possible to configure such that game balls flow into the pseudo winning opening 870 only when a predetermined condition is established. Specifically, for example, a ball storage device capable of switching between a first state in which game balls are stored and a second state in which game balls are not stored is disposed at an appropriate location in the out zone unit 800. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is established, the ball storage device is changed from the first state to the second state, and the game balls stored in the ball storage device are allowed to flow into the pseudo winning opening 870. It is possible.

Further, in this modification, the assist stop pattern is displayed from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41.
After shifting to a (see FIG. 68(c), FIG. 71(b), (c)), or before the start or end of the assist symbol production (see FIG. 67(a) or FIG. 73(b)), Although the assist symbol variation display area of the sub-display device 41b is blank (blank), it is not limited to this. After the assist stop symbol is transferred to the main display device 41a or when the assist symbol effect is not being executed, the assist symbol variation display area may display, for example, the most recent assist stop symbol in a different display mode from the normal display mode (e.g. , a lighter color than usual), default assist symbols (for example, “00” or “--”, or assist symbols when the power is turned on), or “Tiger ”, “pig”, and “cow” may be displayed.

Further, when a model designation command is received, a display (design, image, etc.) corresponding to the model designation command may be performed in the assist design variation display area of the sub display device 41b. The display corresponding to the model designation command may be performed on the main display device 41a, but since the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed on the main display device 41a, the display corresponding to the model designation command is displayed on the sub display device 41b. preferably displayed.
Also, the assist stop pattern is a predetermined combination (for example, "tiger tiger", "pig cow", "7 tiger", "
11”, “continuous”, “reserved”, etc.), notification of expectations, execution/suggestion of pending change notice, execution/suggestion of pseudo-continuous change effect, mini game (result of mini game to notify reach occurrence, hold change, pseudo continuous occurrence), etc. may be executed. That is, the assist stop pattern may not directly act on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game of the main display device 41a, but may be made to act indirectly through an effect related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Further, the variable display of the assist symbols may be related to the general-purpose game, or may be the general-purpose game itself.

Also, in this modification, the variable display of the assist symbols is stopped during the variable display of the first to third symbols (
However, it is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to stop the variable display of the assist symbols (display the assist stop symbol) when the two variable displays are stopped and only the remaining one is displayed.
In addition, in the present modification, the assist stop pattern acts on the decoration special figure variation display game by becoming a predetermined combination, but it may be the other way around. Specifically, for example, a reach occurs in the decoration special figure variation display game on the main display device 41a, and the reach pattern is displayed on the sub display device 4
1b, an effect that fits within the assist symbol variation display area of the sub-display device 41b may be performed. In this case, an effect using all three 7-segment displays of the main display device 41a can be executed. That is, the assist pattern of the sub display device 41b and the main display device 41a
The decoration patterns interact with each other, and part of the result of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (for example, the reach pattern) is the main display device 41a (first display area) and the sub display device 41b (second display area)
It is sufficient if it is possible to go back and forth between
Also, the assist symbol effect is not performed by the sub-display device 41b, but by a light-emitting device (LED
etc.) or both the sub display device 41b and the light emitting device (dot LED).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the winning areas (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 3
6, normal variable winning device 37, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) and an out area (out zone unit 80) into which game balls that do not win the winning area can flow
0), in the out area, a specific game using the game ball that has flowed into the out area game), and when it is determined that the result of the specific game has reached a predetermined result,
Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (assist symbol effect in the case of this modification) is provided.

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball presentation) can be performed within the out area (out zone unit 800), the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using a game ball that has flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800), and is not an effect using a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the winning area. Fairness and impartiality of games can be maintained.
Note that the specific game is not a game played in the out area, that is, a game using a game ball that has flowed into the out area, but a winning area (general winning opening 35, start winning opening 36, normal variable winning opening 37, first special Variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39, etc.)
That is, it may be a game using game balls that have flowed into the winning area. An example in which the specific game is a game played within the winning area, that is, a game using game balls that have flowed into the winning area will be described in Modification C below.

Further, in this modification, the entrance (inlet 8
10) is provided below the most downstream winning area among a plurality of winning areas (in the case of this modification, the starting winning opening 36), and has a larger acceptance width of game balls than the winning area. It is possible to configure
By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a specific game using game balls that have no chance of winning a prize. A game ball that does not enter the prize winning area has no chance of winning a prize, and gives the player a useless image or a lost image. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to have such a bad image.

In addition, in the present modification, the specific game mechanism includes the pseudo prize winning port 870 and the pseudo prize winning port 8 for game balls.
70 (in the case of this modification, the fly member 840 and the rotor 880), and the movable member (in the case of this modification, the rotor 880) is provided with a magnet for attracting game balls. , it is possible to lift the game ball attracted to the magnet by rotating it, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines that the result of the specific game is a predetermined result when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870. It is possible to configure so that it can be determined that

By configuring in this way, the game ball can be placed in the out area (out zone unit 800
), it is possible to increase the interest in the specific game (game ball presentation).
In addition, the specific game is an effect using game balls that have flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800), and is not an effect using game balls that have the possibility of winning in the winning area.
As a specific game, an effect that cannot be performed using a game ball that has the possibility of winning a prize in the winning area, for example, lifting the game ball against gravity by a movable member (rotating body 880) as in this modification It is possible to perform such a production.
Note that the movable member is not limited to the spring member 840 and the rotating body 880, and can be changed as appropriate. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted between a first state in which game balls are stored and a second state in which game balls are not stored, or a V movable member ( A movable member that can guide a game ball to a specific area) may be used.

In addition, in this modification, the production control means (production control device 300) is based on the establishment of the starting condition, the first display area (in the case of this modification, the main display device 41a) display a plurality of identification information variably. A variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) can be executed, and as a predetermined effect, a second display area different from the first display area (in the case of this modification, the sub display device 41b
) can perform an effect (assist pattern effect) in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it appear as if a variable display game has been executed by a game ball that has flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800).
A game player can be given an image that the identification information is constantly changing without any waste balls, and the playability is improved.
In addition, in the case of this modification, the first display area is provided in the main display device 41a, and the sub display device 4
Although the second display area is provided in 1b, that is, the first display area and the second display area are provided in separate display devices, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first display area and the second display area are provided in the same display device. It may be provided in the display device.

In addition, in this modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is stopped and displayed in the first display area (in the case of this modification, the main display device 41a) in a state in which a part of the identification information is complete. When a reach state in which the remaining identification information is variably displayed occurs, a predetermined effect (in this modification , assist symbol effect), the identification information is stopped and displayed (Fig. 68(a)
etc.), part of the identification information in the first display area (identification information that is stopped and displayed in an unaligned state) is changed to identification information that is stopped and displayed in a aligned state in the second display area (assist stop symbol ) to generate a reach state (see FIG. 68(c), etc.).
By configuring in this way, the second display area (in the case of this modification, the sub display device 41
The identification information (assist stop pattern) stopped and displayed in b) can be made to appear as if it assists the occurrence of ready-to-win, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) controls the second display area in the variable display game executed before the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which the ready-to-win state occurs. (In the case of this modification, when the sub-display device 41b is stopped and displayed with the identification information aligned), the identification information is aligned in the second display area until the variable display game in which the ready-to-win state occurs. It is possible to configure so that the stop display continues (FIGS. 69 to 71
reference).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation for the generation of reach over a plurality of variable display games, and thus it is possible to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) enlarges and displays the identification information stopped and displayed aligned in the second display area (in the case of this modification, the sub-display device 41b). Later, by replacing the identification information that is still and displayed in the first display area (the main display device 41a in this modification) with the identification information that is enlarged and displayed in the second display area, It can be configured to generate a reach condition (Fig. 68(b)
), (c), etc.).
By configuring in this way, the identification information (assist stop symbol) stopped and displayed in the second display area is enlarged to partially display the identification information (non-reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the first display area. ) can be skipped (pushed away) to make it look as if a ready-to-win state has occurred, which improves the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) stops and displays a part of the identification information in the first display area (in the case of this modification, the main display device 41a) in a state where it is not aligned. , the second display area (the sub-display device 41b in the case of this modification) can be configured to stop and display the identification information in a uniform state (see FIG. 79).
By constructing in this way, it is possible to perform a loser resurrection effect, and the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of this modification executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, it is advantageous for the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state, a display device (sub-display device 41b) capable of displaying a predetermined moving image and effect control means (effect control device 3) capable of controlling game-related effects are provided.
00), and the effect control means performs a first effect (for example, assist symbol performance) is executed, and the second performance is executed in response to the fact that the result of the first performance is a specific result (for example, the assist stop symbols are in a predetermined combination), and the first performance is executed. It may be configured such that the third effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect) can be executed when the number of times that the result becomes a specific result is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times.
By configuring in this way, an effective presentation can be executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 80, an out area (out zone unit 800)
When a game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870, the assist symbol effect is executed, and the cumulative image corresponding to the number of times the assist stop symbol becomes a predetermined combination (the number of specific results) is displayed on the sub display device 4
1b, and when the number of times that the assist stop pattern becomes a predetermined combination (the number of specific results) is a predetermined number or more (for example, n5 times or more), the SP reach performance etc. is executed, and the SP reach performance etc. is performed. The accumulated image may be erased when executed.
In the example shown in FIG. 80, as the accumulated image, a point image indicating a value based on the number of times the assist stop symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (the number of specified results) is displayed. display mode) is changed from "first mode (mode of displaying a point image of '100pt'; see FIG. 80(b))" to "second mode (mode of displaying a point image of '200pt'; FIG. 80(c) )”→“Third Mode (Mode for displaying a point image of “300pt”. See FIG. 80(d))”→“Fourth Mode (Mode for displaying a point image of “400pt”. FIG. 80(e ))” is switched in order. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80, the cumulative value switching display effect is executed as the second effect.

In this way, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes a predetermined image (cumulative image) to appear on the display device (sub display device 41b) as the second effect, and the result of the first effect is a specific result. It is possible to execute an effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image according to the fact that the assist stop pattern has become a predetermined combination, and it is possible to execute a third effect (SP ready-to-win effect, etc.). As a condition, the display mode of the predetermined image may be returned to the normal display mode (for example, a mode in which the point image is not displayed, or a mode in which the point image "0pt" is displayed).
Of course, the predetermined image is not limited to the point image, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image is not limited to the effect shown in FIG. 80 (effect of increasing the point value), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a predetermined image is a meter image,
As an effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image, an effect of increasing the meter value may be performed.

When the assist stop pattern is directly applied to the special figure variation display game (decorative pattern), the player may misunderstand or misunderstand, but as shown in FIG.
And by executing the third production, the assist stop pattern indirectly (via media such as images and characters) affects the decorative special figure fluctuation display game, making it difficult to misunderstand and misunderstand and improve interest. do.

Note that the third effect is not limited to being executed when the number of times the result of the first effect becomes a specific result reaches or exceeds a predetermined number of times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be an effect corresponding to the effect mode of the second effect.
Specifically, for example, the third effect is the ready-to-win effect. Then, when the effect mode of the second effect (display mode of the cumulative image) at the start of the special figure variation display game with the reach effect is the first mode, as the third effect in the special figure variation display game Runs out reach production or normal reach production, and in the case of the second mode, executes reach production of normal reach or more as the third production in the special figure fluctuation display game, and in the case of the third mode,
Execute reach production of SP reach or more as the third production in the special figure fluctuation display game,
In the case of the fourth mode, a ready-to-win effect with a particularly high degree of expectation among SP ready-to-win may be executed as the third effect in the special figure variation display game.

Also, for example, the third production is a pending change production (production to change the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display), and the display mode (color) of the decorative special figure start memory display is white < blue < yellow < green < purple Expectations are high in the order of <red<rainbow, and the normal display mode (normal color) of the decorative special figure start memory display is not a single color, but a mixed color or two or more colors. Then, when the production mode (accumulated image display mode) of the second production at the pending change timing is the first mode, the production of changing the color of the decorative special figure start memory display to white as the third production is executed. Then, in the case of the second mode, an effect of changing the color of the decoration special figure start memory display to a color of blue or more is executed as the third effect, and in the case of the third mode, decoration as the third effect A production is executed to change the color of the special figure start memory display to a color of green or more, and in the case of the fourth mode, a third production is performed to change the color of the special figure start memory display to a color of red or more. may be executed.

Also, for example, the third effect is a pseudo continuous variable effect. Then, when the effect mode of the second effect (the display mode of the accumulated image) at the start of the special figure variation display game with the pseudo continuous variable effect is the first mode, the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect is 1 as the third effect. In the case of the second mode, the performance of the pseudo consecutive number of 2 is performed as the third presentation, and in the case of the third mode, the pseudo consecutive number is performed as the third presentation. is 3 times, and in the case of the fourth mode,
As the third effect, an effect in which the number of times of pseudo-runs is four may be executed.

In addition, when the number of lit (light emitting) character light emitting parts exceeds a predetermined number, or when the point value (or meter value) reaches a certain value or more, an alternative effect may be executed. good.
Also, during the execution of a special figure variation display game where the result is a big hit, if the number of lit (light emitting) character light emitting parts exceeds a predetermined number, or if the point value (or meter value) exceeds a certain value When it becomes , an effect of notifying the number of rounds of the big win (for example, an effect of displaying the number of rounds of the big win in the sub-display area 41b) may be performed.

<Modification C of game board>
Modification C of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG.
FIG. 81(a) is a view for explaining the essential parts of the game board 30 of Modification C, and is a view (front view) seen from the front side. Also, FIG. 82(a) is a diagram for explaining the essential parts of the game board 30 of this modified example, and is a perspective view seen from the front side.
The game board 30 of this modified example basically has the same configuration as the game board 30 of the modified example B, and mainly different parts will be described below. In the out-zone unit 800 of the modified example B, game balls that have not won any of the plurality of winning areas provided in the game area 32 can flow in, whereas the out-zone unit 900 of the present modified example Winning game balls can flow into the winning area (in the case of this modification, the starting winning opening 36).

As shown in FIG. 81(a) and FIG. 82(a), the out zone unit 900 has a game board 3
0 is formed on the front side of the game board 30, and a pseudo prize winning hole 900 is formed on the rear side of the game board 30.
A winning opening forming member 910 forming a, a rotating body 920 disposed behind the game board 30,
A first guiding flow path 93 for guiding a game ball that has entered the starting winning port 36 (that is, a game ball that has flowed into the starting winning port 36 and has been detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a) to the rotating body 920
0a and a second guiding flow path 940a for guiding the game ball lifted from the bottom to the pseudo winning opening 900a by the rotating rotating body 920. and a guiding channel member 940 .
81(a) and 82(a), some of the members are omitted in order to show the first guide channel member 930, the rotating body 920, and the second guide channel member 940 in an easy-to-understand manner. is doing. For example, in FIGS. 81(a) and 82(a), illustration of the game board 30 is omitted. Also, in FIG. 81(a), a portion of the stage section 32S that overlaps the rotating body 920 as viewed from the front is indicated by a virtual line (chain double-dashed line) in order to illustrate the rotating body 920 in an easy-to-understand manner.

A portion of the game board 30 that overlaps the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front and a stage portion 32S which rotates when viewed from the front so that the rotating body 920 disposed behind the game board 30 can be visually recognized from the front. The portion overlapping the body 920 has optical transparency. That is, at least a portion of the game board 30 and the stage portion 32S (specifically, a portion overlapping the rotor 920 when viewed from the front) is transparent or translucent.

In this modification, the stage portion 32S is such that the game ball on the stage portion 32S, that is, the game ball guided from the game area 32 outside the center case 40 to the stage portion 32S by the warp flow path portion 43 is It is configured to drop only from the front end side of the stage portion 32S. Specifically, the stage portion 32S is inclined forward downward, for example. Therefore, the game ball does not reach the start winning opening 36 provided on the front side of the game board 30.
2S, but cannot directly flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a provided on the rear side of the game board 30 from the stage portion 32S. That is, the game ball on the stage portion 32S is
It cannot flow into the pseudo prize winning port 900a without going through the starting prize winning port 36, the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920 and the second guide channel 940a.

FIG. 82(b) is a perspective view of the winning opening forming member 910 viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the prize winning opening forming member 910 is elongated in the front-rear direction, and has a front end forming the starting prize winning opening 36 and a rear end forming a pseudo prize winning opening 900a. ing. As shown in FIG. 82(a), the winning opening forming member 910 has a front end portion (that is, the start winning opening 36) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a rear end portion (that is, the pseudo winning opening 90).
0a) penetrates the game board 30 forward and backward so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game board 30. - 特許庁

That is, in this modified example, the starting prize winning port 36 and the pseudo prize winning port 900a are arranged in front and behind. Therefore, the game ball guided by the second guide flow path 940a actually flows into the pseudo prize winning port 900a. 2, it can be seen as if the game ball guided by the second guide flow path 940a wins the start winning port 36. As shown in FIG. In addition, since the game ball guided by the second induction path 940a is a game ball that has entered the starting winning hole 36, by arranging the starting winning hole 36 and the pseudo winning hole 900a back and forth, the starting winning hole 36 It can be shown as if the winning game ball wins again in the starting winning port 36.例文帳に追加
It should be noted that the member forming the start winning opening 36 and the member forming the pseudo winning opening 900a may not be the same member (the winning opening forming member 910). That is, the member forming the starting prize winning port 36 and the member forming the pseudo prize winning port 900a may be separate members.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), an opening 911 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the side or bottom (right side in this modification) of the front end portion of the winning opening forming member 910. It is
The game ball that has won the starting prize winning port 36 passes through this opening 911 and the starting prize winning port 36
from the inside to the outside and flows into the first guide channel 930a.
In this modification, only the game ball that has won the starting prize-winning port 36 flows into the first guide channel 930a and is guided to the rotating body 920 by the first guide channel 930a. Specifically, the first guide flow path 93 for the game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 900
In order to prevent entry into 0a, an obstacle member (for example, a protrusion-shaped or wall-shaped member made of resin), or Multiple nails etc. are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), the width of the first guiding flow path 930a is set to a width that allows game balls to flow down in a line from the upstream side (starting winning port 36 side) to the downstream side (rotating body 920 side). It is
The first guide channel 930a is inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side. That is, the upper surface of the first guide channel member 930 is provided with a height difference (inclination in the case of this modification) such that the upstream side of the first guide channel 930a is arranged at a higher position than the downstream side. there is As a result, the game ball can smoothly flow down the first guide channel 930a (that is, the upper surface of the first guide channel member 930), so that the start winning port 36 and the ball clogging in the first guide channel 930a can be prevented.
The height difference provided on the upper surface of the first guiding channel member 930 may be a step or the like instead of the inclination.
Also, the first guide channel member 930 may be arranged behind the game board 30 . again,
On the upper surface of the first guide channel member 930 (that is, the first guide channel 930a), a ball power suppressing portion (such as unevenness or protrusion) for suppressing the power of the game ball, and a game ball to the hole of the rotating body 920 A ball guide portion (concavities and convexities, protrusions, etc.) may be provided for guiding.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), the first guide flow path 930a is a substantially L-shaped flow path, and has a curved portion so that the game ball can smoothly flow down. The downstream portion of the first guiding channel 930a (
That is, the portion extending in the front-rear direction) is arranged in a through-hole 30b penetrating in the front-rear direction provided in the game board 30, and the downstream end of the first guide flow path 930a is located on the rear surface side of the game board 30. reached. The through-hole 30b provided in the game board 30 is formed to have a size that allows the game ball flowing down the first guide channel 930a to pass therethrough. The game ball guided by the first guide flow path 930a advances from the front side to the rear side of the game board 30 by passing through the through-hole 30b, and moves to the rotating body 920 disposed behind the game board 30. flows into the pores of
Although FIG. 82(a) shows only the inlet (front end) of the through-hole 30b, the outlet (rear end) of the through-hole 30b is substantially the same as the downstream end of the first guide channel 930a, for example. It is located on a plane (the plane is perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

81(b) is a view of the rotating body 920 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 81(c) is a view of the rotating body 9
20 is a view from the front side of a rotating body cover 950 attached to 20. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), the rotating body 920 is a disk-shaped member, and is disposed with its thickness direction substantially aligned with the front-rear direction. The rotating body 920 is attached to the rear surface side of the game board 30 by a rotating shaft 921 passing through the center of the rotating body 920, and the rotating shaft 9
It is configured to rotate about 21 at a constant speed in a constant direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front side in the case of this modification).

The rotating body 920 is provided with a game ball storage portion 920a capable of storing game balls and a game ball discharge portion 920b capable of guiding the game balls to the ball discharge unit. Specifically, the rotating body 92
0 is provided with a plurality of holes (eight holes in this modified example) penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be arranged in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 920 . The hole is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and the game ball is discharged from these holes (specifically, the game ball passes through the hole from the front to the rear). The hole having the discharge regulation wall 922 on the rear end side that regulates the game ball housing portion 920a, and the hole that does not have the discharge regulation wall 922 is the game ball discharge portion 920b.
form.

In addition, in this modification, the number of the game ball ejection portion 920b included in the rotating body 920 is one, but the number of the game ball ejection portion 920b is not limited to one, and may be plural.
Moreover, in this modification, some of the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920 are the game ball housing portions 920a.
However, all of the plurality of holes that the rotating body 920 has may be the game ball housing portion 920a. That is, the rotating body 920 does not have to be provided with the game ball discharging portion 920b.

A transparent rotating body cover 950 that covers the front surface of the rotating body 920 is attached to the rotating body 920 . As shown in FIG. 81(c), the rotator cover 950 is positioned at a predetermined first position (in this modification, the lowest position (that is, the 6 o'clock position)) in the hole of the rotator 920. A game ball is placed in a portion facing the hole that has reached and a portion facing the hole that has reached a predetermined second position (in the case of this modification, the uppermost position (that is, the 12 o'clock position)). passable aperture 9
51.

Rotating body cover 950 is non-rotatably fixed. That is, even if the rotating body 920 rotates, the rotating body cover 950 does not rotate, and one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 maintains the first position, The other of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 maintains the second position.
If the rotating cover 950 is transparent or translucent, the front surface of the rotating body 920 or the like may be provided with a pattern or the like for distinguishing between the game ball discharge portion 920b and the game ball storage portion 920a.
Specifically, for example, a triangular pattern on the front surface of the rotating body 1930 shown in FIG. Also good. In this case, whether the game ball has flowed into the game ball discharge part 920b or the game ball storage part 9
Since it becomes easy to know whether the game ball has flowed into 20a, when the game ball flows into the hole of the rotating body 92, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball will win the simulated winning hole 900a. Become.

The game ball that has flowed down the first guide flow path 930a passes through one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 (in the case of this modification, the lower opening 951), and passes through the rotating body 920.
flows into the hole that has reached the first position (the lowest position in the case of this modification) among the holes of the .
Then, the game ball that has flowed into the hole of the rotating body 920 is discharged from the game ball discharge part 92 .
If it is 0b, it passes through the hole and is discharged to the ball discharge unit.
In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the hole of the rotating body 920 is
In the case of a, when the rotator 920 rotates and the hole reaches the second position (the uppermost position in the case of this modification), one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotator cover 950 is the other (
In the case of this modification, it passes through the upper opening 951) and flows into the second guiding flow path 940a. In this modification, the game ball lifted by the rotating body 920 (that is, the game ball housing portion 92
0a) is configured to flow into the second guide channel 940a.

It should be noted that the rotating body 920 is not limited to one that holds the game ball by means of the holes (the game ball storage part 920a and the game ball discharge part 920b), and may be one that holds the game ball by a magnet, for example. Specifically, for example, the rotating body 920 has a built-in magnet, and the magnet attracts (contacts) the game ball that contacts the magnet arrangement location (the location where the magnet is arranged) on the front surface of the rotating body 920 to the magnet arrangement location. It may be configured such that the game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement position is lifted from the bottom to the top by the rotating rotating body 920 (that is, guided to the second guide flow path 940a).

FIG. 82(c) is a perspective view of the second guiding channel member 940 viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 82(c), the second guiding channel member 940 is a rectangular plate-shaped member, and has an upstream projection 941 projecting backward at the upstream end (the right end in this modification). is provided, and a downstream projection 942 projecting rearward is provided at the downstream end (the left end in the case of this modification). The upstream projection 941 of the second guiding channel member 940
is inserted from the front into the hole 952 (see FIG. 81(c)) provided in the It is inserted from the front into a hole (not shown) provided in a predetermined member. In this way, the second guide channel member 940 can be set in a predetermined state (that is, upstream of the second guide channel 940a) by inserting the upstream protrusion 941 and the downstream protrusion 942 into predetermined holes. side is arranged at a position higher than the downstream side), it can be fixed at a predetermined position (that is, a position where the game ball lifted by the rotating body 920 can be guided to the pseudo winning hole 900a) .
In addition, on the upper surface of the second guide flow path member 940 (that is, the second guide flow path 940a), a ball power suppressing portion (unevenness, protrusion, etc.) for suppressing the power of the game ball, and a game ball to the pseudo winning opening 900a A ball guide portion (concavities and convexities, protrusions, etc.) may be provided for guiding.

A game ball that has entered the start winning hole 36 first passes through an opening 911 provided at the front end portion of the winning hole forming member 910 and flows into the first guide channel 930a.
The game ball that has flowed into the first guide channel 930a flows down the first guide channel 930a, and passes through the through hole 30b provided in the game board 30 and two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950.
One of them (the lower opening 951 in the case of this modification) and the first position (the lowest position in the case of this modification) of the plurality of holes that the rotating body 920 has It flows into the hole to which it reaches.

When the hole reaching the first position is the game ball discharge part 920b, the game ball flowing into the hole is discharged to the ball discharge unit. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball discharge portion 920b from the front of the game ball discharge portion 920b passes through the game ball discharge portion 920b and is discharged to the ball discharge unit.
On the other hand, when the hole that has reached the first position is the game ball housing portion 920a, the game ball that has flowed into the hole is lifted upward by the rotating body 920 that rotates. Then, when the hole reaches the second position (the uppermost position in the case of this modification), the game ball accommodated in the hole is (in the case of this modified example, the upper opening 951) and flows into the second guide channel 940a.

The game ball that has flowed into the second guide channel 940a flows down the second guide channel 940a and flows into the pseudo prize winning port 900a.
As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), an opening 912 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the side or bottom (rear side in this modification) of the rear end portion of the prize winning opening forming member 910. is provided.
The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a passes through the opening 912, advances from the inside of the pseudo winning opening 900a to the outside, and is discharged to the ball discharging unit. In this modified example, only the game ball that has flowed into the second guide channel 940a is configured to flow into the pseudo winning hole 900a. That is, only game balls that have entered the start winning hole 36 can flow into the pseudo winning hole 900a.

Thus, in this modification, the game ball that has won the starting prize opening 36 flows into the game ball discharge portion 920b of the rotor 920 and is discharged to the ball discharge unit, or the rotor 9
When it flows into the game ball housing portion 920a of No. 20, it flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a and is discharged to the ball discharging unit. That is, the game ball that has entered the starting prize winning port 36 is configured not to return to the outside of the out zone unit 900 (the game area 32).

A game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). A detection signal of the pseudo winning hole switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning hole switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
The simulated winning opening 900a of this modified example is an assist starting opening like the simulated winning opening 870 of the modified example B, and when a game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 900a, an assist symbol effect (FIGS. 67 to 73
) is executed. Triggered by the fact that the game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning hole 900a,
It is also possible to execute the effects shown in 0.

In addition, the game balls flowing into the out zone unit 900 are not limited to the game balls that have entered the start winning hole 36, and other winning areas (general winning hole 35, normal variable winning device 37, first special variable It may be a game ball that has won a prize in the prize winning device 38 or the second special variable prize winning device 39).
Also, the game balls flowing into the out zone unit 900 are not limited to the game balls that have entered one winning area, and may be the game balls that have entered a plurality of winning areas. Specifically, for example, a channel may be provided for guiding the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 to the first guide channel 930a. In this case, in the out zone unit 900, the start winning opening 3
A specific game (in the case of this modification, a game of whether or not a game ball flows into the simulated winning port 900a) can be played using the game balls that have won 6 and the game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37. can.

Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of this modification, the winning area (in the case of this modification, the start winning opening 3
6) and an inflow area (out zone unit 9
00), in the inflow area, a specific game (in the case of this modification, a game of whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a )
(in the case of this modification, the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide channel 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a), and when it is determined that the result of the specific game has reached the predetermined result , and a production control means (production control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined production (in the case of this modification, an assist symbol production) is provided.

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball performance) can be performed within an inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as an out area, the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and is not an effect using a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the winning area.
Fairness and impartiality of games can be maintained.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of this modification, the winning area (in the case of this modification, the starting winning opening 36)
And the inflow area (out zone unit 900) into which the game ball that has won the prize area flows
, in the inflow area, a ball effect mechanism (in the case of this modification, the first guide flow path 930a, the rotating body 920, the second Equipped with a guide flow path 940a and a pseudo-winning hole 900a), the ball effect mechanism includes a specific area (pseudo-winning hole 900a) into which the game ball that has won the winning area can flow, and the game ball that has won the winning area to the specific area. and a movable member (rotating body 920 in the case of this modification) that guides.

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, it is possible to perform an effect (game ball effect) using a game ball that has won a prize in an inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as an out area. In the case of this modified example,
A specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a) into which the game ball can flow is provided behind the winning area, and the game ball that has won the winning area can be guided to the specific area, so that the game that has won the winning area As a performance using a ball (game ball performance), a performance can be performed as if a game ball that has already won a prize in a prize winning area will win the prize again in the prize winning area, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect (game ball effect) performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) is the effect using the game ball that has entered the winning area, and is not the effect using the game ball that has not entered the winning area. , the fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.
That is, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example is configured so that only the game ball that has won the winning area (in the case of this modified example, the start winning opening 36) can enter the inflow area (the out zone unit 900). . Specifically, for example, around the first guiding channel member 930, an obstacle member (made of resin Projected or wall-shaped members, etc.) and nails are arranged.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, the movable member (rotating body 920) can be configured to lift the game ball by rotating.
By configuring in this way, game balls are moved into the inflow area (out zone unit 900).
Since the ball can stay inside for a long time, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance (game ball performance) using the game ball that has won the winning area.

In addition, the effect using the game ball that has entered the winning area (game ball effect) is the effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and is a game that has the possibility of winning the winning area. Since it is not a performance using a ball, a performance using a game ball that has won a prize area (
As a game ball performance), a performance that cannot be performed using a game ball that has the possibility of winning a prize in the winning area, for example, a game ball is moved against gravity by a movable member (rotating body 920) as in this modification. It is possible to perform a performance that lifts.
Note that the movable member is not limited to the rotating body 920 and can be changed as appropriate. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted between a first state in which game balls are stored and a second state in which game balls are not stored, or a V movable member ( A movable member capable of guiding a game ball to a specific area) may be used.

《Replay effect》
The predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game becomes a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 900a) is not limited to the assist symbol effect, and can be changed as appropriate. . The predetermined effect may be, for example, a replay effect (specifically, a re-variation effect in the replay effect).
The replay effect is a temporary stop effect that temporarily stops the special figure variation display game in the middle of the special figure variation display game in a predetermined result mode (for example, a result mode of losing), and then that a predetermined condition is established ( In the case of this modification, it is an effect consisting of a re-variation effect of restarting the temporarily stopped decoration special figure variation display game triggered by the fact that the game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning hole 900a. When the replay effect can be executed, the effect control device 300 performs, for example, main processing (see FIG. 74 etc.)
, the replay control process shown in FIG. 83 is executed.

For example, at the start of the special figure variation display game, a replay effect availability lottery for determining whether or not to perform a replay effect during the special figure variation display game is performed, and if the replay effect availability lottery is won, the special figure variation display A replay effect is performed during the game.
Specifically, for example, when the content of the variable effect determined in step C521 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 77, etc.) includes the replay effect, it is determined that the replay effect availability lottery has been won. Then, when the content of the variable effect determined in step C521 includes the replay effect, display setting of the temporary stop effect in the replay effect is performed in step C523. As a result, the decoration special figure variation display game is started, and after a predetermined time, the decoration special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped in a predetermined result mode.

[Replay control processing]
FIG. 83 shows replay control processing in the main processing. In this replay control process, first, it is determined whether or not the temporary stop effect in the replay effect is being executed (the decoration special figure variation display game is being temporarily stopped) (step C421).
When it is determined that the temporary stop effect is not being executed (step C421; N), the replay control process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary stop effect is being executed (step C421; Y), it is determined whether the pseudo winning opening switch has detected a game ball (step C422).

When it is determined that the pseudo winning hole switch has detected the game ball (step C422; Y), that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 900a, the display setting of the re-variation effect in the replay effect is performed (step C423), and ends the replay control process. As a result, the temporarily stopped decorative special figure variation display game is restarted.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo winning opening switch has not detected the game ball (step C42
2; N), that is, when the game ball has not flowed into the pseudo winning hole 900a, it is determined whether the remaining time value of the temporarily stopped decoration special figure variation display game is less than a predetermined threshold value (step C
424). Here, the remaining time value of the decoration special figure variation display game is the time value from the start of the decoration special figure variation display game to the present time from the predetermined value of the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game. is the time value of the difference minus

When it is determined that the remaining time value of the temporarily stopped decorative special figure variation display game is not less than the predetermined threshold value (step C424; N), the replay control process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time value of the temporarily stopped decoration special figure variation display game is less than the predetermined threshold value (step C424; Y), the display setting of the re-variation effect in the replay effect is performed (step C423), and ends the replay control process. As a result, the temporarily stopped decorative special figure variation display game is restarted.

The value of the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game is predetermined, and the temporary stop time is also counted as variation time, so for example, just before the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game during temporary stop When the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a, or when the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a before the fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped decoration special figure fluctuation display game ends, the game ball Triggered by the fact that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a, the temporarily stopped decoration special figure variable display game cannot be restarted. Therefore, when the remaining time value of the temporarily stopped decoration special figure variation display game falls below a predetermined threshold value (step C425; Y), even if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning hole 900a, the temporary stop The middle decoration special figure fluctuation display game will be restarted.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification changes from the first mode (for example, the mode in which the decoration special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped) to the second mode (for example, the mode in which the decoration special figure variation display game is varied). Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a switchable predetermined effect (for example, replay effect) is provided, and the effect control means executes a predetermined effect when a game ball flows into a specific area (pseudo winning hole 900a). can be configured to switch from the first mode to the second mode.
Specifically, an effect control means (
Effect control device 300), and the effect control means has a state in which a predetermined effect is interrupted (for example, a state in which a decoration special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped), and a game ball is placed in a specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a). It can be configured to restart the predetermined effect when it flows in.
By configuring in this way, a replay function using game balls can be provided, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, replay effect) that can be interrupted, the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a only when the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is temporarily stopped, and the decoration special figure fluctuation The configuration may be such that the game balls do not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a when the display game is not temporarily stopped.
This configuration can be realized, for example, by rotating the rotating body 920 during the temporary stop, and keeping the rotating body 920 on standby without rotating when not during the temporary stop. In this case, while the rotation of the rotating body 920 is stopped, there is a possibility that the game balls will overflow the first guide passage 930a. In the case of this modification, it is preferable to wait in the state of the lowest position).
Further, in the configuration, for example, the specific game mechanism (in the case of this modification, the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide channel 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a) in the out zone unit 900 It is also possible to implement a configuration in which a pseudo winning possible state (described later) is entered when the game is stopped, and a pseudo winning impossible state (described later) is entered when the game is not temporarily stopped.

Further, the predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game becomes a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 900a) may be a resurrection effect.
Specifically, for example, when a battle effect is executed in the final effect of SP ready-to-win, a resurrection effect in which a teammate character is revived is started when a game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning hole 900a. Also good. Furthermore, as in the above-described replay effect, if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning hole 900a by a predetermined timing, the game ball
It is also possible to configure so that the resurrection effect is started without flowing into 0a. In addition, a meter that reports the number of game balls that have flowed into the simulated prize winning port 900a (for example, the number of game balls that have flowed into the simulated prize winning port 900a from a predetermined time point to the present time) is displayed, and the level of the meter indicates It is also possible to configure such that the resurrection effect is started upon reaching the maximum.
By performing such a resurrection effect, it is possible to increase the added value of the simulated prize winning opening 900a, so it is possible to expect an increase in interest.

In addition, the predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game becomes a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 900a) is the pending display (decorative special effect) displayed on the display device 41 or the like. The display mode of the figure start memory display) is changed to a display mode that can suggest the look-ahead result etc. (hereinafter "
It may be a pending change effect to change to the final display mode").
Specifically, for example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of displaying a pending display in a display mode (for example, an intermediate mode that glows white) that notifies that a pending change effect may be executed, the intermediate mode The trigger for changing the display mode of the pending display displayed by , etc. to the final display mode may be the inflow of game balls into the pseudo winning hole 900a.
Further, for example, in the case of a game machine that determines the final display mode when a starting memory occurs, and performs a lottery for whether or not to change the display mode each time the pending display corresponding to the starting memory shifts. (Alternatively, it may be a gaming machine that determines the final display mode and the change timing for changing the display mode when the starting memory is generated.) Instead of the result of the change possibility lottery (or the determined change timing), the pseudo winning Priority may be given to inflow of game balls into the opening 900a.
Also, when the start memory occurs, etc., when it is decided to change the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the start memory to the final display mode multiple times, the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning hole 900a is triggered. Alternatively, the display mode of the pending display may be changed to the final display mode at once, or the display mode of the pending display may be changed each time a game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 900a.
Furthermore, as in the replay effect described above, the game ball is placed in the pseudo winning hole 900a by a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the variable display game based on the starting memory that is the target of the pending change effect).
When the game ball does not flow into the virtual winning hole 900a, it is also possible to perform the pending change effect.
By performing such a pending change effect, it is possible to draw attention to the inflow of game balls into the pseudo winning opening 900a. In addition, since it is possible to increase the relevance between the inflow of game balls into the simulated winning hole 900a and the performance, it is possible to expect an improvement in interest.

In addition, it is also possible to display a specific image (cut-in image, character image, etc.) that informs the degree of expectation of the variable display game during or before execution, triggered by the inflow of game balls into the simulated prize winning opening 900a. is. In this case as well, an increase in interest can be expected.
In addition, an effect of stocking the right to execute a predetermined effect (for example, an advance notice effect for a predetermined variable display game) is possible, and a predetermined notification image for notifying the number of stocks of the execution right can be displayed on the display device 41 or the like. In this case, it is also possible to display the predetermined notification image when a game ball enters the pseudo winning hole 900a. In this case as well, an increase in interest can be expected.

《Play ball look-ahead production》
Also, the result of the specific game (that is, whether or not the game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a)
It is also possible to notify (suggest) the result of prefetching by . That is, it is also possible to execute a pre-reading announcement effect (game ball pre-reading effect) using a game ball that has won a prize in the winning area.
In this case, for example, a specific game mechanism in the out zone unit 900 (in the case of this modification, the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide channel 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a
) is converted into a state in which game balls are allowed to flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo winning possible state") and a state in which gaming balls are not allowed to flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo winning impossible state"). configure as possible. In addition, the effect control device 300 is configured to be capable of executing control for converting the specific game mechanism into a pseudo-winnable state and control for converting it into a pseudo-winnable state.
Then, by converting the specific game mechanism into a pseudo winable state, there is a high possibility that the player will be in a state of high expectation (high possibility of reach, high possibility of special result, etc.). By announcing that and converting the specific game mechanism into a pseudo winning impossible state, there is a low possibility that the player will be in a state of high expectations (low possibility of reach, possibility of special results low, etc.).

As described above, the game control device 100 includes the starting winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening, the second
When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37 forming a starting prize winning port, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and a game based on the prize is played at the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the prize. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine the result in advance. The result of this game result pre-determination is the look-ahead result. That is, the look-ahead result is the determination result of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory, and the game is played before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300 .

Specifically, as a look-ahead result, for example, a look-ahead symbol command (such as a look-ahead symbol command including the result of a special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target) and a look-ahead variation command (based on the start memory of the look-ahead target A look-ahead variation pattern command including information on variation patterns in the special figure variation display game, etc.) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 .
The look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead foretelling effect. Pre-reading notice effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 etc. is performed in a manner different from usual, or the display device 41 etc. It is a production that performs a production display. And look-ahead commands (look-ahead pattern commands and look-ahead variation commands)
is a command for notifying in advance the variation pattern and the stop pattern corresponding to the starting memory (starting memory to be read ahead) to be the target of the pre-reading notice effect, and is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of starting winning. . It should be noted that normal pattern-based commands and variation-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

Here, the effect control device 300 executes the look-ahead design-based command process shown in FIG. 84 when the look-ahead design-based command is received. When a prefetch variation command is received, prefetch variation command processing shown in FIG. 85 is executed.

[Processing of look-ahead pattern commands]
FIG. 84 shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing (see FIG. 34). In this look-ahead symbol system command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest pending information is special figure 1 pending (step C811).
If the latest pending information is special figure 1 pending (step C811; Y), that is, if the received look-ahead pattern system command is related to special figure 1 pending, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 pending number Save to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area (step C812), set a look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag (step C814), and end the look-ahead symbol system command processing.

On the other hand, if the latest pending information is not special figure 1 pending (step C811; N), that is,
If the received lookahead design system command is related to special figure 2 reservation, save the command in the special figure 2 lookahead design command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step C813),
A prefetch variation command reception wait flag is set (step C814), and the prefetch symbol system command processing is terminated.
The reason why the prefetching variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C814 is that the prefetching pattern command and the prefetching variation command (prefetching variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Prefetching variation command processing]
FIG. 85 shows the prefetch variation command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing (see FIG. 34). In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not reception of a look-ahead variation command is waiting (step C821). Here, when there is a prefetch variation command reception wait flag set in the prefetch symbol system command processing described above, it is determined that the reception is waiting.
If the prefetch variation command reception is not being waited (step C821; N), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is waiting to receive a look-ahead variation command (step C821; Y), it clears the look-ahead variation command reception wait flag (step C822).

After that, in the processing of steps C823 to C826, the prefetching variation command (prefetching variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for the processing in the effect control device 300.
First, the processing (step C823) of setting the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of pending patterns of the latest hold information is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead variation system command received this time and the relevant Depending on the current pending number of special figure type, to set the MODE conversion table for converting the MODE.

Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the intra-sub prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is obtained (step C824). then
A look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C825), and an intra-sub look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is obtained (step C826).

MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but the content and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE will change depending on the number of reservations at the time of judgment, so judgment at the time of pre-judgment and special figure fluctuation display Game start Judgment results may differ depending on the timing. Therefore, in order to be able to easily and reliably process the pre-reading notice effect without being affected by the number of reservations at the time of judgment, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, and at the time of judgment It is designed so that it can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, a change without reach that may have a short first half fluctuation time depending on the hold situation, or a change without reach and a long first half change time regardless of the hold situation, To make it possible to easily and surely perform processing of a prefetching advance notice performance by converting into MODEs classified by items to be considered in setting the prereading notice performance.

In addition, ACT includes information on changes in the second half, such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach.
The content of the second half variation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of reservations at the time of determination. However, for example, even in normal reach, the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, stop one frame ahead, and hit.
Even with the same type of reach, there are various aspects, and the ACT corresponding to each of them is set, so the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to reach of the same system is converted into the same ACT to reduce the number of ACTs, thereby reducing the processing load such as checking in the process of pre-reading advance notice effect.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C82
7).
If neither MODE nor ACT after conversion is other than 0 (step C827; N), the command value is abnormal, so the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C827; Y), save the converted command in the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the latest hold information and hold number (step C828), Prefetch command consistency check processing (step C829) is performed to determine whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

If the command combination is not normal (step C830; N) as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check processing (step C829), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C830; Y), a pre-reading lottery process (step C831) for lottery execution of the pre-reading notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the game ball pre-reading effect is to be generated (step C832). ).
When the game ball look-ahead effect is not generated (step C832; N), it is determined whether or not a look-ahead announcement effect other than the game ball look-ahead effect is generated (step C834).
On the other hand, when the game ball prefetch effect is generated (step C832; Y), that is, when the game ball prefetch effect is included in the prefetch notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C831), it corresponds to the game ball prefetch effect. The operation to be performed is set (step C833), and it is determined whether or not to generate a look-ahead notice effect other than the game ball look-ahead effect (step C834).

If no pre-reading notice effects other than the game ball pre-reading effect are generated (step C834; N), the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if a look-ahead notice effect other than the game ball look-ahead effect is generated (step C834; Y
), the generated pre-reading notice effect (that is, pre-reading lottery processing (step C831)
(step C835). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 or the like from the current time. In addition, the production that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice production that is performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. These include an effect in which a notice is given by a character appearing during display, and a pending change notice in which the display mode of the decorative start memory display is changed at a later timing than the current time. In addition, as the timing of starting execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game starts. This corresponds to the timing at which the

If the effect does not start immediately (step C835; N), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. In this case, the notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect.
On the other hand, if the effect is to be started immediately (step C835; Y), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect) is set (step C836), and the pre-reading fluctuation system End command processing.

In the look-ahead lottery process (step C831), for example, when the start memory for the lottery is the first start memory (that is, when the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold), the lottery for the game ball look-ahead effect, It is executed together with the lottery for other pre-reading notice effects. In the lottery for the game ball look-ahead effect, if the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory for the lottery is a special result, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory for the lottery is not a special result. It is decided to execute the game ball look-ahead effect (that is, the game ball look-ahead effect is selected) with a higher probability than the case. Alternatively, if the reach effect occurs during the special figure fluctuation display game based on the starting memory for the lottery, it has a higher probability than when the reach effect does not occur during the special figure fluctuation display game based on the starting memory for the lottery. , it is determined to execute the game ball look-ahead effect (that is, the game ball look-ahead effect is selected). Hereinafter, the game ball which generated the starting memory for the lottery is called "target game ball".

Then, when the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-reading lottery process includes the game ball pre-read effect (step C832; Y), an operation corresponding to the game ball pre-read effect is set (step C833). When the operation corresponding to the game ball look-ahead effect is set, the effect control device 3
00 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo-winnable state to the pseudo-winable state after a predetermined first time elapses, and converts the specific game mechanism to the pseudo-winable state after the elapse of a predetermined second time from the conversion. It is configured to convert from the state to the pseudo winning impossible state.

When the out zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. When the discharge control wall 922 provided in each game ball storage portion 920a is changed to be openable and closable, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo winable state and a pseudo winnable state.
Specifically, the openable and closable discharge regulation wall 922 can regulate the discharge of the game ball (the game ball passing through the hole from the front to the rear) in the closed state, but in the open state. In this case, the discharge of game balls cannot be regulated.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG.
When the discharge control wall 922 provided in is closed, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball storage portion 920a is guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a by the rotating body 920 and the second guide flow path 940a It will happen.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(b), when the discharge regulation wall 922 provided in the game ball storage portion 920a of the rotating body 920 is open, the game ball flowing into the game ball storage portion 920a passes through the game ball housing portion 920a and is discharged to the ball discharge unit.
That is, by closing all the discharge control walls 922 (or the discharge control walls 922 provided in the game ball storage section 920a into which the target game balls are scheduled to flow), the specific game mechanism enters a pseudo winning state, By opening all the discharge control walls 922 (or the discharge control walls 922 provided in the game ball housing portion 920a into which the target game balls are to flow),
The specific game mechanism enters a state in which pseudo winning is not possible. In this case, the motion of the rotator 920 can be switched between the pseudo winning possible state and the pseudo winning impossible state while the movement of the rotating body 920 remains constant. That is, since it is difficult for the player to distinguish at a glance whether the pseudo-winnable state or the pseudo-winnable state, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest even in the pseudo-winnable state.

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning impossible state to the pseudo winning possible state after a predetermined first time, and after a predetermined second time from the conversion, It is configured to convert the specific game mechanism from a pseudo-winnable state to a pseudo-winnable state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 86, the first time is, for example, a slightly shorter time than the time required for the game ball to enter the start winning opening 36 and flow into the hole of the rotating body 920. It is set in advance based on the length of the guiding channel 930a and the like. In addition, the second time is, for example, the time required for the game ball to flow into the second guide passage 940a after the game ball flows into the hole of the rotating body 920, that is, the hole of the rotating body 920 is at the first position (this In the case of the modified example, the time is slightly longer than the time required to move from the lowest position) to the second position (in the case of this modified example, the highest position). is set.

Thereby, for example, the timing (
at a timing presumed to be immediately before the inflow), it becomes possible to convert the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning impossible state to the pseudo winning possible state,
At the timing immediately after the flow into 40a (the timing assumed to be immediately after the flow), it is possible to convert the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winable state to the pseudo win impossible state.

Alternatively, if the out-zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is modified, for example, as shown in FIG. 941), and all the holes of the rotating body 920 are made into the game ball storage portion 920a (the game ball storage portion 920a having the discharge control wall 922 that cannot be opened and closed). Even when the change is made, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo-winnable state and a pseudo-winnable state.
Specifically, the rotatable second guide channel member 940 rotates to form an upstream high state in which the upstream side of the second guide channel 940a is positioned higher than the downstream side, Second guide channel 9
The upstream side of 40a can be converted to an upstream low state arranged at a lower position than the downstream side.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(a), when the second guide channel member 940 is in the upstream side high state, the game ball that has flowed into the second guide channel 940a moves downstream (pseudo winning opening) 90
0a side), drops from the second guiding flow path member 940, and flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(b), when the second guide channel member 940 is in the upstream low state, the game ball that has flowed into the second guide channel 940a is moved downstream (pseudo winning opening). 900a side), falls from the second guide channel member 940, and flows into the out port 30a outside the out zone unit 900 (game area 32).
That is, when the second guiding flow path member 940 changes to the upstream high state, the specific game mechanism enters the pseudo winning state, and when the second guiding flow path member 940 changes to the upstream low state, the specific game mechanism The game mechanism enters a state in which pseudo-winning is not possible.

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning impossible state to the pseudo winning possible state after a predetermined first time, and after a predetermined second time from the conversion, It is configured to convert the specific game mechanism from a pseudo-winnable state to a pseudo-winnable state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 87, the first time is, for example, a slightly shorter time than the time required for the game ball to enter the start winning opening 36 and flow into the second guiding path 940a. It is set in advance based on the length of the guide channel 930a, the rotation speed of the rotating body 920, and the like. Also, the second time is, for example, a slightly longer time than the time required for the game ball to flow into the second guide channel 940a and then into the pseudo winning port 900a.
It is set in advance based on the length of 0a and the like.

As a result, for example, the specific game mechanism is changed from the pseudo-win-impossible state to the pseudo-win-possible state at the timing just before the target game ball flows into the second guiding path 940a (timing assumed to be just before the flow). While it is possible, the target game ball is a pseudo winning hole 9
At the timing immediately after entering 00a (timing assumed to be immediately after entering), it is possible to convert the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning possible state to the pseudo winning impossible state.

Further, when the out-zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. exiting flow path) is provided, and an opening and closing door 931 is provided at the branch point to the branch flow path 930b, and all of the holes of the rotating body 920 are formed into the game ball storage section 920a.
Even when the game ball container 920a has a discharge control wall 922 that cannot be opened and closed, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo-winnable state and a pseudo-winnable state.
Specifically, the open/close door 931 rotates to open the inlet of the downstream portion of the first guide channel 930a and close the inlet of the branch channel 930b. 930
It can be converted to a mainstream closed state in which the inlet of the downstream portion of a is closed and the inlet of the branch channel 930b is opened.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(a), when the opening/closing door 931 is in the main stream open state, the game ball flowing down the first guide channel 930a is moved to the downstream portion of the first guide channel 930a. It enters, flows into the hole of the rotating body 920 (the game ball housing portion 920a), and is guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a by the rotating body 920 and the second guiding flow path 940a.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88(b), for example, when the opening/closing door 931 is in the mainstream closed state, the game ball flowing down the first guide channel 930a enters the branch channel 930b and enters the first guide channel. It falls from the flow path member 930 and flows into the out port 30a outside the out zone unit 900 (game area 32).
That is, when the opening/closing door 931 changes to the mainstream open state, the specific game mechanism enters a pseudo winning state, and when the opening/closing door 931 changes to the mainstream closed state, the specific game mechanism enters a pseudo prize impossible state. .

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning impossible state to the pseudo winning possible state after a predetermined first time, and after a predetermined second time from the conversion, It is configured to convert the specific game mechanism from a pseudo-winnable state to a pseudo-winnable state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 88, the first time and the second time are set in advance based on, for example, the length of the first induction channel 930a and the position of the branch channel 930b.
Specifically, the first time is, for example, the timing immediately before the target game ball arrives at the branch point to the tributary channel 930b (timing assumed to be just before arrival), and the specific game mechanism is placed in a pseudo prize-impossible state. It is set to the time when it is possible to convert from to the pseudo winable state.
Also, during the second time, for example, when the target game ball is at the entrance (
That is, at the timing immediately after passing through the entrance (front end) of the through-hole 30b provided in the game board 30 (timing assumed to be immediately after passing), the specific game mechanism is changed from the pseudo winning possible state to the pseudo winning impossible state. It is set to the time when it is possible to convert to

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of this modification includes a winning area (in the case of this modification, the start winning opening 36) and an inflow area (out zone unit 900) into which the game balls that have won the winning area flow. A specific game (in the case of this modification, a game of whether or not a game ball flows into the pseudo winning port 900a) is performed using a game ball that has won a prize in the winning region in the inflow region of the gaming machine equipped with Mechanism (in the case of this modification, the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide channel 9
40a and simulated prize winning opening 900a), and notification means (effect control device 300) for notifying predetermined information (in the case of this modification, the result of prefetching) according to the result of a specific game.

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, a specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be notified according to the result of the specific game. can increase the interest of
Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and is not an effect using a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the winning area. Fairness and impartiality of games can be maintained.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of this modification includes a winning storage means (production control device 300) for storing a winning memory based on the winning of the game ball to the winning area (in the case of this modification, the start winning opening 36), and a winning A game executing means (production control device 300) for executing a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) based on a plurality of pieces of identification information based on memory, and a variable display game based on the winning memory is executed. and a pre-determination means (production control device 300) that determines before the game is played, and the notification means (production control device 300) is configured to notify the determination result (prefetch result) of the pre-determination means by the result of the specific game. It is possible.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the result of the pre-reading based on the result of the specific game, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the predetermined information notified by the result of the specific game is not limited to the look-ahead result, that is, the game result of the variation display game before execution (result-related information of the unspent variation).
It can be changed as appropriate, and for example, it may be the game result of the variable display game being executed (result-related information of the variable during digestion).

《Game ball storage device》
Also, the out zone unit 900 may include a game ball storage device 960 .
89(a) is a front perspective view of an out-zone unit 900 having a game ball storage device 960, and FIG. 89(b) is a front perspective view of the game ball storage device 960. be.
As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), the game ball storage device 960 includes, for example, a case member 961 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape, and an opening/closing member 962 for opening and closing an outflow port 961b provided in the case member 961. , and an opening/closing drive mechanism (not shown) for driving the opening/closing member 962 .
The front wall of the case member 961 is provided with an inflow port 961a which penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a size through which game balls can pass. Further, the right side wall of the case member 961 is provided with an outflow port 961b penetrating in the left-right direction and having a size through which a game ball can pass. Note that the inflow port 961
The arrangement position of a and the arrangement position of the outflow port 961b can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the outflow port 9
61b may be provided on the bottom wall of the case member 961, for example.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the inlet 961a of the case member 961 is formed by the winning opening forming member 9.
10 is connected to the rear end. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a passes through the opening 912 of the winning opening forming member 910, and enters the inlet 961a of the case member 961.
, enters the inside of the case member 961 and is stored inside the case member 961 .
The case member 961 has optical transparency so that the game balls stored inside the case member 961 can be visually recognized from the front. That is, the case member 961 is a transparent or translucent member.

The opening/closing member 962, for example, as shown in FIG.
1b closed and the outlet 96 of the case member 961 as shown in FIG.
1b can be converted to an open state. When the opening/closing member 962 is opened, the game balls stored inside the case member 961 pass through the outflow port 961b and are discharged to the ball discharging unit.
Effect control device 300, for example, when the predetermined opening timing is reached, converts the opening and closing member 962 from the closed state to the open state, and when the predetermined closing timing is reached, the opening and closing member 962
is configured to transform from an open state to a closed state.

Here, the opening timing for converting the opening/closing member 962 to the opened state can be selected as appropriate.
It may be when the number of game balls stored inside exceeds a predetermined threshold value, or when the player operates the operation means (for example, the production button 25) in a predetermined operation mode. good and
It may be at the start (or end) of a predetermined effect, or at the start (or end) of a variable display game. The number of game balls stored inside the case member 961 can be determined, for example, by counting the number of times the pseudo winning opening switch detects the game balls.
In addition, the closing timing for converting the opening/closing member 962 to the closed state can be selected as appropriate.
For example, when a predetermined time has passed since the opening timing. The predetermined time is, for example, a slightly longer time than the time required to discharge all the game balls in the case member 961 when the inside of the case member 961 is full of game balls, and the size of the case member 961 It is set in advance based on the shape and the like.

Thus, by providing the game ball storage device 960 in the out zone unit 900 and storing the game balls that have flowed into the pseudo prize winning port 900a inside the case member 961, the amount of game balls that have entered the starting prize winning port 36 It is possible for the player to feel the
In addition, from the viewpoint of storing all the game balls that have entered the starting prize winning port 36 inside the case member 961, it is preferable that all the holes of the rotating body 920 are the game ball storage portions 920a.

《Startup winning unit》
Instead of the out zone unit 900, a starting winning unit 360 may be provided. That is, in the game board 30 of this modified example, a starting winning unit 360 having a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) and a pseudo winning opening 360a is arranged above the out opening 30a. It's okay to be there.

FIG. 90 is a view for explaining the main part of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 including the starting winning unit 360, and is a view (front view) seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 90, the starting winning unit 360 includes, for example, a substantially plate-shaped base member 361
, a passage opening forming member 362 attached to the top of the base member 361, and the base member 36
1 and a rotor 363 attached to the approximate center of the rotor.
Pseudo winning openings 360 a are provided on the left and right sides of the rotating body 363 in the base member 361 . An outflow port 364 is provided above the rotating body 363 and below the passage forming member 362 in the base member 361 .

The passage opening forming member 362 has a passage opening 362a that opens toward the upper portion (stage portion 32S).
forming The game ball that has flowed into the passage port 362a passes through, for example, a back flow path (not shown) disposed on the rear side of the base member 361, and flows out of the base member 361 from an outflow port 364 provided in the base member 361. It flows out to the front side (that is, inside the starting winning unit 360).
The passage opening 362a has a shape that simulates a normal starting opening. As a result, the game ball that has actually entered the starting winning unit 360 can win the starting winning opening 36, but by making the passing opening 362a look like a normal starting opening, the starting opening (for example It is possible to make it look as if the game ball that has won the starting prize winning port 36 ) enters the inside of the starting prize winning unit 360 .

A rib-shaped left extension wall 365 and a right extension wall 366 extending forward are provided on the front side of the base member 361 .
The left extending wall 365 forms a guide flow path that guides the game ball flowing out from the outflow port 364 to the left pseudo prize winning port 360a.
In addition, the right extending wall 366 allows the game balls flowing out from the outflow port 364 to pass through the right pseudo winning port 36
It forms a guide channel leading to 0a.

Further, the left extending wall 365 and the right extending wall 366 also have a function of preventing game balls flowing down around the starting winning unit 360 from entering the inside. Specifically, the starting winning unit 36
0 is surrounded by a passage opening forming member 362, a rotating body 363, a left extending wall 365 and a right extending wall 366, whereby game balls other than game balls that have flowed into the passage opening 362a are
Entry into the starting winning unit 360 is prevented. That is, the passage port 362
Only the game ball that has flowed into a can enter inside the starting winning unit 360 .
At least the passage opening forming member 362 and the rotating body 36 on the front surface of the base member 361
3, the left extending wall 365 and the right extending wall 366 are preferably decorated.

The rotating body 363 has, for example, a shape in which a disc member is provided with a recess formed by recessing a part of the outer peripheral surface of the disc member toward the center, and the starting prize opening 36 is formed in the recess. there is The rotating body 363 is configured to rotate left and right at a constant speed. Note that the rotating body 363 may be configured to rotate at a constant speed in a constant direction (for example, clockwise when viewed from the front side).
Rotating body 363 can be converted to a winning state in which game balls flowed out from outlet 364 can enter starting winning port 36 and a difficult winning state in which it is difficult to win (or impossible to win) by rotating left and right. is.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 91(a), the state in which the starting prize-winning port 36 faces the outflow port 364 is the prize-winning state.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the starting winning opening 36 faces the left pseudo winning opening 360a, and for example, as shown in FIG. 91(c), the starting winning opening 36 faces the right pseudo winning opening The state of facing 360a is the difficult-to-win state. When the game ball flowing out from the outflow port 364 cannot flow into the start winning port 36, such as when the rotating body 363 is in a state where it is difficult to win, the game ball will enter the left pseudo winning port 360a or the right pseudo winning port 360a.

A game ball that has entered the starting winning port 36 (that is, a game ball that has flowed into the starting winning port 36 and has been detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a) is discharged to the ball discharging unit.
In addition, game balls that have flowed into the pseudo winning opening 360a are also discharged to the ball discharging unit. A game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 360a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). A detection signal of the pseudo winning hole switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning hole switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.

In this way, the starting winning unit 360 can distribute the game balls flowing into the passage opening 362a to the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 360a inside, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 360a (that is, when it does not win the starting winning opening 36), a predetermined effect is executed, so that the game ball enters the starting winning opening 3
It is possible to reduce the player's disappointment and sense of loss when he or she does not win 6.
The inside of the starting winning unit 360 is visible from the front.

In addition, the effect control device 300, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 360a (that is, when the detection signal of the pseudo winning hole switch is output to the effect control device 300), a predetermined effect (a pseudo winning hole It is also possible to store the effect memory which is the execution right of the effect executed when the game ball flows into 360a, and display the number of undigested effect memories. The number of undigested effect memories is preferably displayed so as to be distinguishable from the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the undigested starting memory.

<<Modified example of out zone unit>>
A starting prize-winning port 36 (first starting prize-winning port, starting prize-winning area) is disposed above the out port 30a.
And the out-zone unit provided with a pseudo prize-winning hole is not limited to the out-zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, but can be changed as appropriate, and may be an out-zone unit 1900 shown in FIG. 92, for example.

As shown in FIG. 92, the out zone unit 1900 includes, for example, a substantially plate-shaped base member 1910, a distribution member 1920 attached to the top of the base member 1910, and a substantially central portion of the base member 1910. It comprises a rotating body 1930 and a ball rolling member 1940 attached to the right part of the base member 1910 .
Above the distribution member 1920 in the base member 1910 is provided a starting prize winning port 36, and below the ball rolling member 1940 in the base member 1910 is provided a pseudo prize winning port 1900a. An upper outlet 1911 is provided behind the distribution member 1920 in the base member 1910 , and a lower outlet 1912 is provided in the base member 1910 below the rotating body 1930 . In addition, above the distribution member 1920 in the base member 361 and below the start winning opening 36, the outflow port 19
13 are provided.

A game ball that has entered the starting prize winning port 36 passes through, for example, a back flow path (not shown) disposed on the rear side of the base member 1910, and flows out from an outflow port 1913 provided in the base member 1910 to the base member 1910. (that is, inside the out-zone unit 1900).

On the front side of the base member 1910, a rib-shaped left outer extending wall 1951, a left inner extending wall 1952, a right outer extending wall 1953, a right inner extending wall 1954, and an entry prevention wall 19 extend forward.
55 is provided.
The left outer extending wall 1951 and the left inner extending wall 1952 form a guide flow path that guides the game balls that flow out from the outflow port 1913 and are distributed to the left side by the distribution member 1920 to the lower out port 1912. ing.
In addition, the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954 form a guide flow path that guides the game balls that flow out from the outlet 1913 and are distributed to the right side by the distribution member 1920 to the ball rolling member 1940. forming.

In addition, the entry prevention wall 1955, together with the left outer extension wall 1951 and the right outer extension wall 1953, prevents game balls flowing down around the out zone unit 1900 from entering the inside. Specifically, the inside of the out zone unit 1900 is surrounded by a left outer extending wall 1951, a right outer extending wall 1953, and an entry prevention wall 1955, whereby the game ball that has entered the start winning opening 36 Game balls other than the above are prevented from entering the inside of the out zone unit 1900. - 特許庁That is, only the game ball that has won the starting prize winning port 36 can enter the inside of the out zone unit 1900 .

The distribution member 1920 is, for example, a substantially V-shaped member having a recess 1921, and the recess 1921 can receive a game ball. The distribution member 1920 is connected to the rotation shaft 1
Centered on 922, it is configured to rotate left and right at a constant speed.
The distribution member 1920 rotates left and right to enter the start winning opening 36 and the outflow opening 1913.
A post-distribution state in which the game balls that flow out from are received by the recessed portion 1921 and are distributed to the rear side (upper out port 1911), and a left swing in which the game balls that enter the starting winning port 36 and flow out from the outflow port 1913 are distributed to the left side. It can be converted into a minute state and a right distribution state in which the game balls that have entered the starting prize winning port 36 and flowed out from the outflow port 1913 are distributed to the right side.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG.
) is the backward distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the post-distribution state,
The game ball that entered the starting winning port 36 and flowed out from the outflow port 1913 is received by the concave portion 1921 of the distribution member 1920, and the upper out port 191 formed behind the distribution member 1920.
1 and discharged to the sphere discharge unit.
For example, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the state in which the concave portion 1921 faces rightward is the left distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the left distribution state, the game ball that has entered the start winning opening 36 and flowed out from the outflow port 1913
and the left inner extending wall 1952 to the lower out port 1912 . The game ball that has flowed into the lower out port 1912 is discharged to the ball discharge unit.

For example, as shown in FIG. 93(c), the state in which the concave portion 1921 faces left is the right distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the right distribution state, the game ball that has entered the start winning opening 36 and flowed out from the outflow port 1913
and the right inner extending wall 1954 to the ball rolling member 1940 . Ball rolling member 19
The game ball guided to 40 flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a via the ball rolling member 1940 and is discharged to the ball discharging unit.

The rotating body 1930 is a disk-shaped member, and is disposed with its thickness direction substantially aligned with the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10 . Rotating body 1930 rotates at a constant speed in a constant direction (clockwise when viewed from the front side in this example).
Rotating body 1930 contains a magnet. This magnet attracts (
(holding in contact). When the game ball comes into contact with the magnet placement location of the rotating body 1930 , it is attracted to the magnet placement location, lifted upward by the rotating rotating body 1930 , and guided to the ball rolling member 1940 .

Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 is attracted to the magnet arrangement position of the rotating body 1930 before flowing into the lower out port 1912, the lower out port 1912
is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 without flowing into the .
On the other hand, the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 flows into the lower out port 1912 when it is not attracted to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930 .
In the example shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, there is only one position where the magnets are arranged on the rotating body 1930 (specifically, the position indicated by the triangular pattern provided on the front surface of the rotating body 1930). The location may be multiple locations.

The ball rolling member 1940 is a circular dish-shaped member called a so-called croon. A communication hole 1941 is formed to flow down to 1900a. The game ball that has flowed into the ball rolling member 1940 gradually flows down to the center while circling, and passes through the communication hole 1941 to the pseudo winning opening 19.
00a.

A game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 1900a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). A detection signal of the pseudo winning hole switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning hole switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect. As the predetermined effect, for example, an effect in which a hot character, a group of characters, or the like appears is executed.

For example, when a game ball wins in the starting prize winning port 36, the performance control device 300 determines whether or not to perform a distribution performance of rotating the distribution member 1920 with the start memory stored based on the winning as a lottery target. A lottery for whether or not distribution performance to be determined is performed. This distribution effect is a kind of pre-reading notice effect, and in the distribution effect availability lottery, for example, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the lottery object is a special result, the start of the lottery object It is decided to execute the distribution effect with a higher probability than when the result of the special figure variation display game based on memory is not the special result. That is, it can be said that the distribution performance is a performance with a high degree of expectation (expectation for a big hit).
As the distribution effects, a weak left distribution effect, a strong left distribution effect, and a right distribution effect are set. note that,
For example, the expected value increases in the order of weak left shift effect<right shift effect<strong left shift effect.

The distribution member 1920 rotates, for example, only at the time of distribution performance, and maintains the initial state (post-distribution state) at other times. Therefore, when it is determined not to execute the distribution effect in the distribution effect availability lottery, the game ball that has entered the start winning opening 36 and flowed out from the outflow port 1913 is received by the concave portion 1921 of the distribution member 1920. and flows into the upper out port 1911 .
On the other hand, when the execution of the right distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect availability lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 from the initial state (backward distribution state) to the right distribution state. Convert to As a result, the game ball that has entered the starting prize winning port 36 and flowed out from the outflow port 1913 is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo prize winning port 1900a.

Further, when the execution of the strong left distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect availability lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to shift from the initial state (backward distribution state) to the left. Convert to state. As a result, the game ball that entered the start winning port 36 and flowed out from the outflow port 1913,
It is guided to the lower out port 1912 . The rotating body 1930 rotates, for example, only during the strong leftward shift effect, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the leftward strong effect is attracted to the rotating body 1930 where the magnet is arranged before flowing into the lower out port 1912, the rotation It is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 by the body 1930 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. On the other hand, if the magnet is not attracted to the rotating rotating body 1930 before flowing into the lower out port 1912 , it flows into the lower out port 1912 . In this way, in the left-handed strong effect, it is possible to perform a loser resurrection effect such that the game ball that was likely to flow into the lower out port 1912 flows into the pseudo winning port 1900a. Increased interest.

In addition, when the execution of the weak left distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect availability lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to shift from the initial state (backward distribution state) to the left. Convert to state. As a result, the game ball that entered the start winning port 36 and flowed out from the outflow port 1913,
It is guided to the lower out port 1912 . Rotating body 1930 is in a state where the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 cannot be attracted to the magnet arrangement location (for example, the magnet arrangement location faces the upper side (opposite to the lower out port 1912) while the rotation is stopped. state) is maintained. Therefore, the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the leftward weak effect is the rotating body 1930
flow into the lower out port 1912 without being attracted to the position where the magnet is arranged.

Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 having the out-zone unit 1900, the inflow area (
In the out zone unit 1900), a specific game (for example, a game of whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a) using the winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36) is specified. Game mechanics (eg, left outer extending wall 1951 and left inner extending wall 195)
2, the guide channel formed by the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954, the distribution member 1920, the rotating body 1930, the ball rolling member 1940, and the pseudo winning opening 1900a) and an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a hot character or a group of characters appears) when it is determined that the result of the specific game has reached a predetermined result; It has

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball performance) can be performed within an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and is not an effect using a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the winning area. Fairness and impartiality of games can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 equipped with the out-zone unit 1900, the notification means (the effect control device 300) for notifying the predetermined information (for example, the result of the prefetching) by the result of the specific game.
can be configured to have
Here, the results of the specific game are, for example, ``game balls flowed into the upper outlet 1911 (that is, the distribution effect was not executed)'', ``game balls were distributed to the left side and the lower out It flowed into the opening 1912 (that is, a weak leftward distribution effect was executed)", "The game ball was distributed to the left side and flowed into the pseudo winning hole 1900a (that is, a strong leftward distribution effect was executed)". , "the game ball was distributed to the right side and flowed into the pseudo winning opening 1900a (that is, the right distribution effect was executed)".

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, a specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be notified according to the result of the specific game. can increase the interest of
In addition, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and is not an effect using a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the winning area. Fairness and impartiality of games can be maintained.

<Modified example of allocation effect>
Here, a modification of the distribution effect in which the distribution member 1920 is rotated will be shown. Concretely, an example of the case of suggesting the currently set probability setting value and the big hit history by the production mode of the distribution production will be shown.
As described above, as the distribution production, the left distribution weak production (distribution production of left distribution weak mode), the left distribution strong production (distribution production of left distribution strong mode), the right distribution production (right Distribution effect of distribution mode) is set. That is, there are a weak left distribution mode, a strong left distribution mode, and a right distribution mode in the distribution mode. The expected value (the degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.) increases in the order of, for example, weak left swing effect<right swing effect<strong left swing effect. That is, in the above-described distribution performance, it is possible to suggest an expected value (big hit expectation, etc.) depending on the performance mode of the distribution performance.

The information that can be suggested by the presentation mode of the distribution presentation is not limited to the expected value and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the currently set probability set value.
Specifically, the effect control device 300, for example, when a game ball wins the starting prize winning port 36, the start memory stored based on the winning is set as a lottery object, and the distribution member 1920 is rotated. Perform a distribution production availability lottery to determine whether to perform or not.
The distribution member 1920 rotates, for example, only at the time of distribution performance, and otherwise maintains the initial state (post-distribution state). Therefore, when the distribution performance availability lottery is not won (when it is determined that the distribution performance is not executed in the distribution performance availability lottery), the game ball that enters the starting winning port 36 and flows out from the outflow port 1913 is received by recess 1921 of distribution member 1920 and flows into upper outlet 1911 .

On the other hand, when the distribution effect availability lottery is won (when the execution of the distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect availability lottery), the effect control device 300 shakes based on the currently set probability setting value. A performance mode of minute performance is determined, and a distribution performance is executed in the determined performance mode.
For example, as shown in FIG. 94(a), if the currently set probability setting value is "3" or "4"
In the case of , the distribution effect of the right distribution mode (right distribution effect) is executed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert from the initial state (backward distribution state) to the right distribution state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the starting prize winning port 36 and flowed out from the outflow port 1913 is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo prize winning port 1900a. That is, in this case, the right flow path (induction flow path formed by the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954) is selected as the flow path through which the game ball that has flowed into the out zone unit 1900 passes. .

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(a), when the currently set probability setting value is "5" or "6", the distribution effect of the left shift strong mode (left shift strong effect ) is executed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert from the initial state (backward distribution state) to the left distribution state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the starting prize winning port 36 and has flowed out of the outflow port 1913 is guided to the lower out port 1912 . The rotating body 1930 rotates, for example, only during the strong leftward shift effect, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the strong leftward direction is the lower out port 191
2, it is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 by the rotating body 1930 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. On the other hand, if the magnet is not attracted to the rotating rotating body 1930 before flowing into the lower out port 1912 , it flows into the lower out port 1912 . That is, in this case, as the flow path through which the game ball that has flowed into the out zone unit 1900 passes, the flow path with left rotation (
The left flow path (the guiding flow path formed by the left outer extending wall 1951 and the left inner extending wall 1952)+with rotation of the rotating body 1930) is selected.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(a), when the currently set probability setting value is "1" or "2", the distribution effect of the weak left shift mode (weak left shift effect ) is executed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert from the initial state (backward distribution state) to the left distribution state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the starting prize winning port 36 and has flowed out from the outflow port 1913 is guided to the lower out port 1912 . Rotating body 1930 is in a state where the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 cannot be attracted to the magnet arrangement location (for example, the magnet arrangement location faces the upper side (opposite to the lower out port 1912) while the rotation is stopped. state) is maintained. Therefore, the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the left swing effect is
It flows into the lower outlet 1912 without being attracted to the position where the magnet is arranged on the rotating body 1930 . That is, in this case, the flow path through which the game ball that has flowed into the out zone unit 1900 passes is the flow path without left rotation (left flow path (induced flow formed by the left outer extending wall 1951 and the left inner extending wall 1952). path) + no rotation of rotor 1930) is selected.

Thus, by executing the distribution performance, it is possible to suggest that the lottery for whether or not the distribution performance has been won (that is, the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher than the case where the lottery for whether or not the distribution performance has been won). In addition, the presently set probability set value can be suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect.
Depending on the effect mode of the distribution effect, the flow path selected as the flow path through which the game ball that has flowed into the out zone unit 1900 (hereinafter referred to as "out ball passage flow path") is different. Therefore, in the case of this modified example, it can be said that the currently set probability set value can be suggested by the selected out-ball passage channel.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification uses a game ball that has won a winning area (eg, starting winning opening 36) within the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) to perform a specific game (eg, selected specific game mechanisms (e.g., the left channel (the guiding channel formed by the left outer extending wall 1951 and the left inner extending wall 1952), the right channel (Guiding channel formed by right outer extending wall 1953 and right inner extending wall 1954), distribution member 1920, rotating body 1930).

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball performance) can be performed within an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using a game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and is not an effect using a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the winning area. Fairness and impartiality of games can be maintained.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of this modification can be configured to include notification means (effect control device 300) for notifying predetermined information (for example, the currently set probability set value) according to the result of a specific game.
Here, the result of the specific game is, for example, ``the selected out ball passage is the ``left side rotation non-flow'', or ``the selected out ball passage is the ``right side''. or "the selected out-sphere passing flow path is a 'flow path with left-hand rotation'".
Therefore, a specific game (game ball effect) can be played in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be notified according to the result of the specific game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be able to.
Note that the inflow area is not limited to the out-zone unit 1900, and can be changed as appropriate.
, or the starting winning unit 360 may be used.

Also, the selectivity of the channel corresponding to the currently set probability setting value does not have to be 100%. That is, it is also possible to select a flow path that does not correspond to the probability set value, so that the selectivity of the flow path that corresponds to the probability set value is higher than the selectivity of the flow path that does not correspond to the probability set value. .
Specifically, for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 94(a), the flow path corresponding to the probability setting value "3" or "4" is the right flow path, and the flow path that does not correspond is the left flow non-rotating flow path. In that case, it is possible to select not only the right side flow path, but also the left side non-rotating flow path and the left side rotating flow path. The selectivity of the right channel may be higher than the selectivity of . In the case of such a configuration, based on the tendency that the right flow path is likely to be selected, the player can set the currently set probability setting value to "3" or "
4" can be inferred. Other probability setting values can be similarly configured.
Therefore, even when configured in this manner, the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the selected out-ball passage flow path (that is, the effect mode of the distribution effect).

In addition, the information suggested by the selected out-ball passage channel (that is, the information suggested by the presentation mode of the distribution presentation) is not limited to the currently set probability setting value, and can be changed as appropriate.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(b), the selected out-ball passage channel may suggest a history of big wins. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 94(b), when the selected out-ball passing flow path is the "flow path without left rotation" (or when the "flow path without left rotation" is most likely to be selected). , it can be inferred that the cumulative value of the number of big hits is less than 15 times, and if the selected out ball passing flow path is the "right flow path" (or the "right flow path" is most likely to be selected case), it can be inferred that the accumulated value of the number of big hits is 15 or more and less than 30 times, and if the selected out ball passing flow path is a "flow path with left rotation" (or "left rotation In the case where "the flow path" is most likely to be selected), it can be estimated that the cumulative value of the big hits is 30 times or more. Of course, the jackpot history suggested by the selected out-ball passage channel is not limited to the cumulative value of the number of jackpots (the total value of the number of occurrences of the special game state from a predetermined time point to the present time) and can be changed as appropriate. , the cumulative value of the number of consecutive wins (total value of the number of consecutive wins from a predetermined time point to the present time).

Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the special game state is generated when the result of the game is a special result. In a possible game machine, a plurality of flow paths through which game balls can pass
selection means (effect control device 300), and switching means (distribution member 1920) for switching the flow path according to the selection result of the selection means.
, rotating body 1930).
Therefore, the predetermined information can be suggested by the flow path through which the game ball passes. That is, since an effect suggesting predetermined information can be performed as the effect using the game ball, the attraction of the effect using the game ball can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, setting means ( game control device 100), and the predetermined information can be configured to be a probability set value (currently set probability set value) set by the setting means (Fig. 94 (a
)reference).
By configuring in this way, as an effect using the game ball, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting the probability set value set by the setting means (currently set probability set value). It is possible to enhance the interest of the production using.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, the predetermined information can be configured to be history information (jackpot history) regarding special results (see FIG. 94(b)).
By configuring in this way, history information (
Since an effect suggesting a history of big hits can be performed, the interest in the effect using game balls can be enhanced.

In addition, the predetermined information is not limited to the probability set value set by the setting means (currently set probability set value) or the history information (jackpot history) regarding the special result. The predetermined information may be, for example, a base value or a role item ratio. Here, the base value is the payout based on the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the winning in the winning area. It is a value calculated from the number, and the information necessary for displaying the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected in the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. . In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering the prize opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. This is the ratio of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize gate (excluding middle ones) (so-called continuous role ratio), and information necessary to display the role ratio includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (number of winning balls for each role).

Also, for example, below the normal symbol starting gate 34, a plurality of guiding channels capable of guiding game balls to the starting winning opening 36 (or general winning opening 35), a constantly rotating distribution member, and a game Switching means (e.g., a guide valve) for switching the guide flow path through which the ball passes among the plurality of guide flow paths
may be provided so as to switch the guide channel according to predetermined information (for example, the currently set probability setting value). Specifically, for example, the plurality of guide channels include an advantageous guide channel in which the game ball is easily guided to the starting prize winning port 36 (or general winning prize port 35), There is a disadvantageous guide flow path that is difficult to guide to the general winning port 35),
The switching means is an opening/closing member that opens and closes the entrance of each of the guide channels provided in the plurality of guide channels. , and flows into a guiding channel with an open entrance (that is, a guiding channel selected based on predetermined information) among the plurality of guiding channels.
In this configuration, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability of selecting an advantageous guide channel as the guide channel through which the game ball passes. can be Further, when configured in this way, the control of the switching means is effect control device 30
Instead of 0, the game control device 100 may perform. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the switching means may be operated (switching operation) when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting gate 34 as a trigger.

Further, for example, on the stage portion 32S, a plurality of guide channels capable of guiding the game ball to the starting prize winning port 36 (or the general winning prize port 35) and a guide channel through which the game ball passes are provided. A switching means (for example, a guide valve) for switching in the path may be provided to switch the guide path according to predetermined information (for example, the probability setting value currently set).
In such a configuration, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability of selecting an advantageous guide channel as the guide channel through which the game ball passes. can be Further, when configured in this way, the control of the switching means is effect control device 30
Instead of 0, the game control device 100 may perform.

Also, for example, in the big prize opening, there are a plurality of guide channels capable of guiding the game ball to a specific area (for example, V area), and a guide channel through which the game ball passes is switched among the plurality of guide channels. A switching means (for example, a guide valve) may be provided to switch the guide flow path according to predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability setting value).
In this configuration, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability of selecting an advantageous guide channel as the guide channel through which the game ball passes. can be Further, when configured in this way, the control of the switching means is effect control device 30
Instead of 0, the game control device 100 may perform.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, the variation display game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the variation display game is a special result, the special game state specific game execution means (
Effect control device 300), setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability set value from among a plurality of probability set values to which probability values used for the lottery of the variable display game are assigned,
, and the probability setting value set by the setting means (currently set probability setting value) can be suggested depending on the result mode of the specific game. Specifically, in the case of this modified example, the result mode of the specific game is ``the selected out-ball passing flow path is 'a flow path without left-hand rotation'',''
Either the selected out-sphere passing flow path is a "right side flow path" or the selected out-sphere passing flow path is a "left-side rotating flow path".
Therefore, as a game different from the variable display game, it is possible to play a specific game that can suggest the currently set probability setting value, so that the interest in the game different from the variable display game can be enhanced.
The information that can be suggested by a game different from the variable display game is not limited to the currently set probability setting value and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a history of big wins.

<Modified example of specific game>
The specific game different from the variable display game is not limited to a game played in the out zone unit (for example, a game regarding which out ball passage path is selected) and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the specific game that is different from the variable display game may be, for example, a game that is executed in the wake of a pseudo winning.
A roulette effect, for example, can be given as a game that is executed in response to a pseudo winning.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 95(a), when a game ball flows into a pseudo prize winning port 1900a (or may be a pseudo prize winning port 870 or a pseudo prize winning port 900a), a plurality of character images are displayed. A roulette effect may be executed in which the included roulette image is rotated and the roulette image is stopped at a predetermined timing.
At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the currently set probability set value may be suggested depending on the result mode of the roulette performance. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 95(b),
When the first character stops at the arrow position (or when the first character is most likely to stop at the arrow position), the player sets the currently set probability setting value to "1" or "
2", and when the second character stops at the arrow position (or when the second character is most likely to stop at the arrow position), the currently set probability setting value is "3" or "4", and if the third character stops at the arrow position (or if the third character is most likely to stop at the arrow position), the current setting It can be inferred that the probability setting being set is '5' or '6'. For example, in the roulette effect shown in FIG. 95(a), the second character is stopped at the position of the arrow as a result of the roulette effect, so the currently set probability setting value is "3".
or "4".

Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the variation display game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the variation display game is a special result, a special In a gaming machine capable of generating a game state, specific game execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a specific game (for example, roulette effect) different from the variable display game and a probability value used for the lottery of the variable display game are allocated. A setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability setting value from among the plurality of probability setting values obtained, and the probability setting value set by the setting means ( The currently set probability setting value) can be suggested. Specifically, in the case of this modification, the result mode of the specific game is one of "stop with the first character", "stop with the second character", and "stop with the third character".
Therefore, as a game different from the variable display game (a game triggered by the pseudo winning), it is possible to play a specific game that can suggest the currently set probability set value, so that the interest of the game is different from the variable display game. can increase

Information that can be suggested by a game other than the variable display game (a game triggered by a simulated winning) is not limited to the currently set probability setting value and can be changed as appropriate. It may be a degree (such as the degree of expectation of a big hit or the degree of reach generation expectation).
Also, the specific game (the game triggered by the pseudo winning) different from the variable display game is not limited to the roulette effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, with the simulated winning as an opportunity, for example, expectation suggestive images G2 shown in FIGS.
That is, a specific image (for example, a character image "?" or a character image "!") may be displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment, and for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, etc. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.
For example, in the above modifications B and C, the main display device (segment display) 41
The decoration special figure variation display game is executed in a, and the effect etc. are executed in the sub display device 41b, but the reverse may be done. Also, the main display device 41a may be a display device (such as a liquid crystal display device) similar to the sub display device 41b.

10 game machine 30 game board 32 game area 32L left flow down area (predetermined game ball flow down area)
32R right-side flow-down area (predetermined game ball flow-down area)
32W warp flow path (predetermined game ball flow down area)
41 display device (display means)
41L left overlapping region (overlapping region)
41R right overlapping region (overlapping region)
41W warp overlap area (overlap area)
100 game control device (setting means)
300 effect control device (game execution means, suggestion effect execution means, selection means, specific game execution means)
1920 distribution member (switching means)
1930 rotator (switching means)
G2 Image suggesting degree of expectation

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to the player according to the result of the game,
a suggesting effect executing means for executing a suggesting effect suggesting execution of a predetermined advance notice effect;
In the suggestive effect, a specific display can be displayed,
The specific display has a first specific display and a second specific display,
Depending on the number and type of specific displays displayed in the suggestive effect, the degree of expectation for execution of the predetermined advance notice effect differs,
The expectation level of the first suggestive effect consisting of one of the first specific displays, the expectation level of the second suggestive effect of one of the second specific displays, and the second suggestive effect of a plurality of the first specific displays. 3, the expectation level of a fourth suggestive effect consisting of a plurality of the second specific displays, and the fifth suggestive effect consisting of the first specific display and the second specific display. Differentiate expectations and
The game machine is characterized in that the degree of expectation of the fourth suggestive performance is set higher than that of the second suggestive performance, and the degree of expectation of the fifth suggestive performance is set lower than that of the second suggested performance.

Images